Barnes' Notes on the Bible · Acts Chapter 2

Optimized commentary reader

Chapter commentary

Acts Chapter 2

1

Acts 2:1

Open passage

简体中文

五旬节到了 - “五旬节”(Pentecost)一词是希腊文,意指一物的第五十分之一,或按次序的第五十。在犹太人中,这词用于他们的三大节期之一,该节期始于逾越节之后的第五十日。这节期是从亚笔月(即四月)十六日、也就是逾越节的第二日起算的。逾越节的羊羔是在那月十四日黄昏宰杀的(Leviticus 23:5);十五日是圣会——那是节期的正式开始;十六日献上庄稼的初熟之物,从那日起算七个七日,即四十九天,直到称为五旬节的节期,因此它是在逾越节节期第一天之后的第五十天。这节期也称七七节,因它紧接着一连数个七日而来(Exodus 34:22;Numbers 28:26;Deuteronomy 16:10)。它也是一个收割的节期,因此也称为收割节;为此,在这次节期要献上两个用新细面做的饼作为初熟之物(Leviticus 23:17、Leviticus 23:20;Numbers 28:27-31)。

到了 - 即日子已经临到。这里所用的词字面意思是“完成”,在此不是指那日子本身,而是指它来到之前所须经过之时段的完结(Olshausen)。见 Luke 9:51。参 Mark 1:15;Luke 1:57。提及五旬节的时候已经来到、已经完全临到这一事实,是为解释下文所记何以有那么多的异地客居之人和外人在场。圣灵所应许的感动被暂缓,直到可能最多的犹太人同时聚集在耶路撒冷之时,好叫福音得以传给广大的群众,地点正是在主耶稣被钉十字架之处;同时也借他们把福音带到地上遥远的地区。

门徒都 - 可能不仅指使徒们,也指 Acts 1:15 所提到的一百二十人。

同心合意 - 见 Acts 1:14。他们可能一直聚集到这时候,并完全投身于敬虔的事。

在一处 - 这是什么地方无从得知。注释家们对此的推测众说纷纭。有人认为那是 Acts 1:13 所提到的楼房;有人认为是圣殿中的一个房间;有人认为是在会堂里;也有人认为是在圣殿院子里为敬拜而聚集的混杂人群中。见 Acts 2:2。许多人认为这事发生在七日的第一日,即基督徒的安息日。但要确立这一点有困难。犹太人自己中间对守这节期的时间可能就有分歧:律法说他们要数算七个安息日,即七个七日,“从安息日的次日”起算(Leviticus 23:15)。对于这里的安息日,法利赛人理解为逾越节的第二日,无论它落在一周的哪一天,那一日都被守为圣会,也可以称为安息日。但卡拉派(Karaite)犹太人——即那些坚持按字面解释圣经的人——则主张这里所说的安息日是指通常的安息日,即一周的第七日。因此,在他们那里,五旬节总落在七日的第一日;若使徒们附和他们的看法,那么这日子便在今天基督徒的主日完全来到。但若遵照法利赛人的看法,而且主耶稣曾与他们一同在星期四守逾越节(许多人如此认为),那么五旬节就会落在犹太人的安息日,即星期六(Kuinoel;Lightfoot)。这一问题无法定夺,也无关紧要。按照后期犹太人的做法,五旬节也被守为一个纪念西奈山颁布律法的节期;但旧约中找不到这种习俗的痕迹。

English original

And when the day of Pentecost - The word "Pentecost" is a Greek word signifying the 50th part of a thing, or the 50th in order. Among the Jews it was a applied to one of their three great feasts which began on the 50th day after the Passover. This feast was reckoned from the 16th day of the month Abib, or April, or the second day of the Passover. The paschal lamb was slain on the 14th of the month at evening, Leviticus 23:5; on the 15th day of the month was a holy convocation - the proper beginning of the feast; on the 16th day was the offering of the firstfruits of harvest, and from that day they were to reckon seven weeks, that is, 49 days, to the feast called the Feast of Pentecost, so that it occurred 50 days after the first day of the Feast of the Passover. This feast was also called the Feast of Weeks, from the circumstance that it followed a succession of weeks, Exodus 34:22; Numbers 28:26; Deuteronomy 16:10. It was also a harvest festival, and was accordingly called the Feast of Harvest; and it was for this reason that two loaves made of new meal were offered on this occasion as first-fruits, Leviticus 23:17, Leviticus 23:20; Numbers 28:27-31.

Was fully come - When the day had arrived. The word used here means literally "to be completed," and as employed here refers, not to the day itself, but to the completion of the interval which was to pass before its arrival (Olshausen). See Luke 9:51. Compare Mark 1:15; Luke 1:57. This fact is mentioned, that the time of the Pentecost had come, or fully arrived, to account for what is related afterward, that there were so many strangers and foreigners present. The promised influences of the Spirit were withheld until the greatest possible number of Jews should be present at Jerusalem at the same time, and thus an opportunity be afforded of preaching the gospel to vast multitudes in the very place where the Lord Jesus was crucified, and also an opportunity be afforded of sending the gospel by them into distant parts of the earth.

They were all - Probably not only the apostles, but also the 120 people mentioned in Acts 1:15.

With one accord - See Acts 1:14. It is probable that they had continued together until this time, and given themselves entirely to the business of devotion.

In one place - Where this was cannot be known. Commentators have been much divided in their conjectures about it. Some have supposed that it was in the upper room mentioned in Acts 1:13; others that it was a room in the temple; others that it was in a synagogue; others that it was among the promiscuous multitude that assembled for devotion in the courts of the temple. See Acts 2:2. It has been supposed by many that this took place on the first day of the week; that is, on the Christian Sabbath. But there is a difficulty in establishing this. There was probably a difference among the Jews themselves as to the time of observing this festival: The Law said that they should reckon seven sabbaths; that is seven weeks, "from the morrow after the sabbath," Leviticus 23:15. By this Sabbath the Pharisees understood the second day of the Passover, on whatever day of the week it occurred, which was kept as a day of holy convocation, and which might be called a Sabbath. But the Karaite Jews, or those who insisted on a literal interpretation of the Scriptures, maintained that by the Sabbath here was meant the usual Sabbath, the seventh day of the week. Consequently, with them, the day of Pentecost always occurred on the first day of the week; and if the apostles fell in with their views, the day was fully come on what is now the Christian Sunday. But if the views of the Pharisees were followed, and the Lord Jesus had with them kept the Passover on Thursday, as many have supposed, then the day of Pentecost would have occurred on the Jewish Sabbath, that is, on Saturday (Kuinoel; Lightfoot). It is impossible to determine the truth on this subject. Nor is it of much importance. According to the later Jews, the day of Pentecost was kept also as a festival to commemorate the giving of the Law on Mount Sinai; but no trace of this custom is to be found in the Old Testament.

2

Acts 2:2

Open passage

简体中文

忽然——这事突然而至,一下子临到他们。他们虽然等候圣灵降临,却未必料到圣灵会以这种方式降临。这是一件大事,是关系到教会福祉的事,因此圣灵的恩赐理当以某种醒目、可感的方式赐下,好叫他们自己心里确信所应许的已经应验,也使别人深深感受到这事件的伟大与重要。

有响声——ἦχος, ēchos。这词可用于任何响声或传闻。Hebrews 12:19,"号角的声音";Luke 4:37,"他的名声"等。可比照 Mark 1:28。

从天上来——好像是自天空急冲而下。因此,这声音既因其突然而猛烈引人注意,也因其来临的方向引人注意。暴风通常水平地吹刮,这声音却似乎来自上方;"从天上来"这说法的含义即在于此。

好像一阵大风吹过——按字面是"好像猛烈的疾风扫过"——φερομένης, pheromenēs——如暴风般急速掠过。这样的风有时来得极猛、声势极大,以致在狂风之中连雷声也难以听见。这奇特现象的响声看来正是如此。经文并未显示当时真有风,只是那突来的响声如同这样扫掠的暴风。不过可以留意,在圣经中,风常用作神圣感力的表号,参看 John 3:8。风无形却大有能力,故此代表圣灵的运行。希伯来文的 רוּח ruwach 与希腊文的 πνεῦμα pneuma,同样都兼指风与灵。神的大能也可以暴风的猛烈来表征,1 Kings 19:11;Psalm 29:1-11;Psalm 104:3;Psalm 18:10。在此,好像大风的响声象征圣灵的大能,以及他的降临要在人中间成就的效果。

充满了——不是风充满,而是声音充满。这一点是明显的:

(1)因为经文并没有说当时有任何风;

(2)这句话的语法结构不容许别的解释。"充满了"一词除了"声音"之外,没有别的主语:"忽然,好像一阵大风的声音,(那声音)充满了屋子。"在希腊文里,"风"一词是属格。在此可以指出,这神迹实际上远比通常所设想的更为惊人。若是暴风,固然可怕;大风也必使人心惊。但那并无奇异或非凡之处,因为这类事常有发生,人的思想自然只把它当作一场寻常的风暴(尽管或许骇人)。然而,当万籁俱寂、无风暴、无风、无雨、无雷的时候,这样一阵急冲的响声必抓住他们的注意,使所有的心思都转向如此奇特、无从解释的现象。

他们所坐的屋子——有人推测这是圣殿内或圣殿附近的一间屋子。但经文既未明提圣殿,这推测就未必可信。它大概是 Acts 1:13 所提到的那处私人住宅。若说这样的住宅容不下不久便聚拢的这么一大群人,可以回答说:他们的宅院有宽大的中庭(参看 Matthew 9:2 的注释),而且经文并未断言本章所记的事发生在他们所住的那间屋里。这事大概发生在庭院之中和房屋的四周。

English original

And suddenly - It burst upon them at once. Though they were waiting for the descent of the Spirit, yet it is not probable that they expected it in this manner. As this was an important event, and one on which the welfare of the church depended, it was proper that the gift of the Holy Spirit should take place in some striking and sensible manner, so as to convince their own minds that the promise was fulfilled, and so as deeply to impress others with the greatness and importance of the event.

There came a sound - ἦχος ēchos. This word is applied to any noise or report. Hebrews 12:19, "the sound of a trumpet"; Luke 4:37, "The fame of him," etc. Compare Mark 1:28.

From heaven - Appearing to rush down from the sky. It was suited, therefore, to attract their attention no less from the direction from which it came, than on account of its suddenness and violence. Tempests blow commonly horizontally. This appeared to come from above; and this is all that is meant by the expression. "from heaven."

As of a rushing mighty wind - Literally, "as of a violent blast borne along" - φερομένης pheromenēs - rushing along like a tempest. Such a wind sometimes borne along so violently, and with such a noise, as to make it difficult even to hear the thunder in the gale. Such appears to have been the sound of this remarkable phenomenon. It does not appear that there was any wind, but the sudden sound was like such a sweeping tempest. It may be remarked, however, that the wind in the sacred Scriptures is often put as an emblem of a divine influence. See John 3:8. It is invisible, yet mighty, and thus represents the agency of the Holy Spirit. The same word in Hebrew רוּח ruwach and in Greek πνεῦμα pneuma is used to denote both. The mighty power of God may be denoted also by the violence of a tempest, 1 Kings 19:11; Psalm 29:1-11; Psalm 104:3; Psalm 18:10. In this place the sound as of a gale was emblematic of the mighty power of the Spirit, and of the effects which his coming would accomplish among people.

And it filled - Not the wind filled, But the sound. This is evident:

(1) Because there is no affirmation that there was any wind.

(2) the grammatical structure of the sentence will admit no other construction. The word "filled" has no nominative case but the word "sound": "and suddenly there was a sound as of a wind, and (the sound) filled the house." In the Greek, the word "wind" is in the genitive or possessive case. It may be remarked here that this miracle was really far more striking than the common supposition makes it to have been. A tempest would have been terrific. A mighty wind might have alarmed them. But there would have been nothing unusual or remarkable in this. Such things often happened; and the thoughts would have been directed of course to the storm as an ordinary, though perhaps alarming occurrence. But when all was still; when there was no storm, no wind, no rain, no thunder, such a rushing sound must have arrested their attention, and directed all minds to a phenomenon so unusual and unaccountable.

All the house - Some have supposed that this was a room in or near the temple. But as the temple is not expressly mentioned, this is improbable. It was probably the private dwelling mentioned in Acts 1:13. If it be said that such a dwelling could not contain so large a multitude as soon assembled, it may be replied that their houses had large central courts (See the notes on Matthew 9:2), and that it is not affirmed that the transactions recorded in this chapter occurred in the room which they occupied. It is probable that it took place in the court and around the house.

3

Acts 2:3

Open passage

简体中文

又显现出来——即被他们看见,或说他们看见了。火先在楼房里被他们看见,然后才以舌头的形状停在门徒的头上。也许那火起初只是闪烁或迸射的火花,直到后来才固定在他们的头上。

舌头——γλῶσσαι glōssai。"舌头"一词在圣经中经常出现,指作为味觉和言语器官的身体部位,也用来指"语言"或"言语"本身。它也像在我们语言中一样,用来指形状与舌头相似的东西。因此 Joshua 7:21、Joshua 7:24(希伯来原文)有"金舌"之说,即一块金子;Joshua 15:5;Joshua 18:19;Isaiah 11:15 有"海舌"之说,即海湾或海汊。我们今天也照样说"舌形陆地"。"火舌"一语在旧约中只出现过一次,即 Isaiah 5:24:"因此,如火吞灭碎秸(希伯来文作'火舌'),如火焰烧尽"等等。在这里,"舌头"这名称是因尖细的火焰形状与人舌相似而得来。凡长而窄、末端渐尖的东西,在希伯来文中都这样称为"舌"。因此,这词在这里指细长而尖锐的火焰形状,起初也许在楼房里不规则地移动。

分开——即分开的、分离的——διαμεριζόμεναι diamerizomenai——出自动词 διαμερίζω diamerizō,意为"分开,或分成数份"。Matthew 27:35:"他们分了他的衣服";Luke 22:17:"拿这个(杯)去,你们分着喝"。一般人的见解大概是,这些舌头或火焰中的每一个都是裂开的、分叉的、剖开的。但这并不是这说法的意思。这里的观念是:它们彼此分开、互相分离;那并不是一大团火焰,而是裂开或分成许多部分,并且这些部分大概在楼房里毫无秩序地移动。叙利亚文译本作:"有如火的舌头向他们显现,自己分开,落在他们各人身上。"古埃塞俄比亚文译本读作:"有火之类的向他们显现,停在他们身上。"

落在他们各人头上——或作"停住",即以轻柔摇曳的火焰形状,"停"在每人的头上。这表明那奇事是针对他们的,也是所应许的圣灵降临的一个极有意义的表记。在大响声和火焰显现之后,他们不能怀疑这里有着神非同寻常的介入。火或火焰的显现,历来被视为神性最显著的表记。因此 Exodus 3:2-3 说,神在焚烧却没有烧毁的荆棘中向摩西显现自己;又如 Exodus 19:16-20,神在雷轰、闪电、烟气与火中降临西奈山,这些都是他临在和大能的显著表记。另见 Genesis 15:17。Deuteronomy 4:24 说神是"烈火"。比较 Hebrews 12:29。参看 Ezekiel 1:4;Psalm 18:12-14。熟读古典的读者也会立刻想起 Virgil(Aeneid, b. 2:680-691)那段优美的描写。类似的奇事在世俗作家中也有记载(Pliny, H. N., 2:37; Livy, 1:39)。这些向使徒显现的形状无疑具有象征意义:

(1)象征所应许的圣灵,即纯洁与能力之灵。施洗约翰的预言——"他要用圣灵与火给你们施洗"(Matthew 3:11)——大概立刻浮现在他们的记忆中。

(2)舌头这一独特的形状,象征他们即将能够说出之语言的多样性。任何形状的火都可以表明神的临在和大能;但所采用的形状表达的是"将要发生的事"。同样,耶稣受洗时,"任何神性的显现"都可以表明神的临在和悦纳;但所选的形状却是降下的鸽子,表达他将要充满的温柔谦和的品德。照样,在 Ezekiel 1:4 中,任何形状的火焰都可以表明神的临在;但实际选定的形状,是显著象征他护理之工的形象。同样,这里的显现象征他们开始承担伟大工作时所领受的特殊恩赐——说新方言的能力。

English original

And there appeared unto them - There were seen by them, or they saw. The fire was first seen by them in the room before it rested in the form of tongues on the heads of the disciples. Perhaps the fire appeared at first as scintillations or coruscations, until it became fixed on their heads.

Tongues - γλῶσσαι glōssai. The word "tongue" occurs often in the Scriptures to denote the member which is the instrument of taste and speech, and also to denote "language" or "speech" itself. It is also used, as with us, to denote what in shape resembles the tongue. Thus, Joshua 7:21, Joshua 7:24 (in Hebrew), "a tongue of gold," that is, a wedge of gold; Joshua 15:5; Joshua 18:19; Isaiah 11:15, "The tongue of the sea," that is, a bay or gulf. Thus also we say "a tongue of land." The phrase "tongue of fire" occurs once, and once only, in the Old Testament Isaiah 5:24, "Therefore as the fire devoureth the stubble (Hebrew: tongue of fire), and the flame consumeth," etc. In this place the name tongue is given from the resemblance of a pointed flame to the human tongue. Anything long, narrow, and tending to a point is thus in the Hebrew called "a tongue." The word here means, therefore, "slender and pointed appearances" of flame, perhaps at first moving irregularly around the room.

cloven - Divided, separated - διαμεριζόμεναι diamerizomenai - from the verb διαμερίζω diamerizō, "to divide, or distribute into parts." Matthew 27:35, "they parted his garments"; Luke 22:17, "Take this (the cup) and divide it among yourselves." Probably the common opinion is, that these tongues or flames were, each one of them split, or forked, or cloven. But this is not the meaning of the expression. The idea is that they were separated or divided one from another; it was not one great flame, but was broken up, or cloven into many parts, and probably these parts were moving without order in the room. In the Syriac it is, "And there appeared unto them tongues which divided themselves like fire, and sat upon each of them." The old Ethiopic version reads it, "And fire, as it were, appeared to them and sat on them."

And it sat upon each of them - Or "rested," in the form of a lambent or gentle flame, upon the head of each one. This showed that the prodigy was directed to them, and was a very significant emblem of the promised descent of the Holy Spirit. After the rushing sound and the appearance of the flames, they could not doubt that here was some remarkable interposition of God. The appearance of fire, or flame, has always been regarded as a most striking emblem of the Divinity. Thus, Exodus 3:2-3, God is said to have manifested himself to Moses in a bush which was burning, yet not consumed. Thus, Exodus 19:16-20, God descended on Mount Sinai in the midst of thunders, and lightnings, and smoke, and fire, striking emblems of his presence and power. See also Genesis 15:17. Thus, Deuteronomy 4:24, God is said to be "a consuming fire." Compare Hebrews 12:29. See Ezekiel 1:4; Psalm 18:12-14. The Classic reader will also instantly recall the beautiful description in Virgil (Aeneid, b. 2:680-691). Other instances of a similar prodigy are also recorded in profane writers (Pliny, H. N., 2:37; Livy, 1:39). These appearances to the apostles were emblematic, doubtless:

(1) Of the promised Holy Spirit, as a Spirit of purity and of power. The prediction of John the Immerser, "He shall baptize with the Holy Spirit and with fire" Matthew 3:11 would probably be recalled at once to their memory.

(2) The unique appearance, that of tongues, was an emblem of the diversity of languages which they were about to be able to utter. Any form of fire would have denoted the presence and power of God; but a form was adopted expressive of "what was to occur." Thus, "any divine appearance" or "manifestation" at the baptism of Jesus might have denoted the presence and approbation of God; but the form chosen was that of a dove descending - expressive of the mild and gentle virtues with which he was to be imbued. So in Ezekiel 1:4, any form of flame might have denoted the presence of God; but the appearance actually chosen was one that was strikingly emblematical of his providence. In the same way, the appearance here symbolized their special endowments for entering on their great work - the ability to speak with new tongues.

4

Acts 2:4

Open passage

简体中文

他们就都被圣灵充满——即完全处于圣灵神圣的影响和权能之下。参看 Luke 1:41, Luke 1:67 的注释。"被……充满"一语,表示人的一切官能都被它渗透、投入其中、或处于它的影响之下,如 Acts 3:10,"满心希奇惊讶";Acts 5:17,"满心忌恨";Acts 13:45,"满心嫉妒";Acts 2:4,"满心喜乐,又被圣灵充满"。

说起别国的话来——即开始用不同于母语的语言说话。他们所说的语言在 Acts 2:9-11 中一一列明。

按着圣灵所赐的口才——即按着圣灵赐给他们说话的能力。这话清楚地暗示,他们当时领受了一种恩赐,能说他们此前从未学过的语言。他们的母语是加利利话,即犹太通行语言——叙利亚迦勒底语——中一种相当粗俗的方言。他们当中或许有人略通希腊文和拉丁文,因为这两种语言在犹太人中多少有人使用;但没有任何证据表明他们通晓后来所列各国的语言。曾有人尝试不以神迹来解释这个奇特的现象。但这段经文自然而明显的意思,乃是他们蒙圣灵超自然的能力所赋,能够说外国语,即他们先前不知道的语言。看来并不是每个人都具备说 Acts 2:9-11 所列全部语言的能力;这能力乃是在他们中间,他们合起来能说这些语言——大概有人会说这种,有人会说那种。以下几点说明也许能为这奇事提供一些亮光:

(1)旧约曾预言,这里所记的事要在弥赛亚的时代发生。如 Isaiah 28:11:"主要借异邦人的嘴唇和外邦人的舌头对这百姓说话。"比较 1 Corinthians 14:21,那里把这节经文明确应用于福音之下说外国语的能力。

(2)主耶稣曾应许他们必得这能力(Mark 16:17):"信的人必有神迹随着他们……说新方言。"

(3)这能力在教会中广泛而长久地存在(1 Corinthians 12:10-11):"又叫一人能说方言,又叫一人能翻方言。这一切都是这位圣灵所运行";Acts 2:28:"神在教会所设立的……各种方言"。另比较 Acts 2:30,以及 Acts 14:2, Acts 14:4-6, Acts 14:9, Acts 14:13-14;Acts 14:18-19, Acts 14:22-23, Acts 14:27, Acts 14:39。由此可见,这能力在教会中是众所周知的,并不限于使徒。这也表明,使徒行传所记的这件事中,这能力不仅赐给使徒,也赐给了教会的其他成员。

(4)他们从事伟大工作,领受这能力至关重要。他们要去向万国传道。希腊话和拉丁话虽然通行广泛,却非人人使用,也没有证据表明使徒们精通这些语言。要向万国传道,他们必须能听懂各国的语言。而福音要迅速传遍全地,他们就必须获得这能力,而不必经历被迫慢慢学习语言的漫长过程。只要想到今天福音传播的主要阻碍之一,就在于不能说地上各民族的语言;现代宣教士在预备向一个民族传道之前,总得花费很长的年日去学习当地语言——这一点足以说明问题。

(5)其目的之一是借着神迹确立福音。而能把他们的信息立刻用地上的各种语言传开的能力,是最令人瞩目的神迹。只要记得学习一门外语是何等缓慢而艰辛的过程,就知道这在异教徒眼中必被视为最显著的神迹之一(1 Corinthians 14:22, 1 Corinthians 14:24-25)。

(6)这神迹的真实性和确定性,有福音初期的胜利强力佐证。福音早早传遍普天下,而且是由耶稣基督的使徒们传开的,这是一切历史的清楚见证。他们在阿拉伯、希腊、叙利亚、亚细亚、波斯、非洲和罗马传道。若没有行神迹说这些地方语言的能力,这如何能成就?如今要说外国语尚且需要多年的辛劳;可见福音所记载的成功,正是这神迹之事实最显著的佐证之一。

(7)语言的变乱是罪最明显的后果之一,也是无穷困扰和艰难的根源(Genesis 11)。拯救人类计划的效果之一,就是显明神胜过一切罪恶的大能,从而有力地证明福音足以应对人类一切的罪恶和灾殃——这并不足为奇。此外我们还可以说:

(8)由此可以看出,今天必须训练人作别国的宣教士。行神迹的恩赐已经收回。使徒们借那神迹,直接获得说别种语言的能力。福音要传开,这能力如今仍不可少;只是如今这能力不再是借神迹获得,而是借缓慢而勤勉的学习和辛劳获得。人要具备它,就必须受教。教会既然有义务把福音传给万民(Matthew 28:19),也就有义务使所差派的教师具备任职的资格。因此,为圣工训练人才之所以重要,原因之一正在于此。

English original

Were all filled with the Holy Ghost - Were entirely under his sacred influence and power. See the notes on Luke 1:41, Luke 1:67. To be filled with anything is a phrase denoting that all the faculties are pervaded by it, engaged in it, or under its influence, Acts 3:10, "Were filled with wonder and amazement"; Acts 5:17, "Filled with indignation"; Acts 13:45, "Filled with envy"; Acts 2:4, "Filled with joy and the Holy Spirit."

Began to speak with other tongues - In other languages than their native tongue. The languages which they spoke are specified in Acts 2:9-11.

As the Spirit gave them utterance - As the Holy Spirit gave them power to speak. This language implies plainly that they were now endued with a faculty of speaking languages which they had not before learned. Their native tongue was that of Galilee, a somewhat barbarous dialect of the common language used in Judea - the Syro-Chaldaic. It is possible that some of them might have been partially acquainted with the Greek and Latin, as each of those languages was spoken among the Jews to some extent; but there is not the slightest evidence that they were acquainted with the languages of the different nations afterward specified. Various attempts have been made to account for this remarkable phenomenon without supposing it to be a miracle. But the natural and obvious meaning of the passage is, that they were endowed by the supernatural power of the Holy Spirit with ability to speak foreign languages, and languages to them before unknown. It does not appear that each one had the power of speaking all the languages which are specified Acts 2:9-11, but that this ability was among them, and that together they could speak these languages, probably some one and some another. The following remarks may perhaps throw some light on this remarkable occurrence:

(1) It was predicted in the Old Testament that what is here stated would occur in the times of the Messiah. Thus, in Isaiah 28:11, "With ...another tongue will he speak unto this people." Compare 1 Corinthians 14:21 where this passage is expressly applied to the power of speaking foreign languages under the gospel.

(2) it was promised by the Lord Jesus that they should have this power, Mark 16:17, "These signs shall follow them that believe ...they shall speak with new tongues."

(3) the ability to do it existed extensively and long in the church, 1 Corinthians 12:10-11, "To another divers kinds of tongues; to another the interpretation of tongues: all these worketh that one and the self-same Spirit"; Acts 2:28, "God hath set in the church ...diversities of tongues." Compare also Acts 2:30, and Acts 14:2, Acts 14:4-6, Acts 14:9,Acts 14:13-14; Acts 14:18-19, Acts 14:22-23, Acts 14:27, Acts 14:39. From this it appears that the power was well known in the church, and was not confined to the apostles. This also may show that in the case in the Acts , the ability to do this was conferred on other members of the church as well as the apostles.

(4) it was very important that they should be endowed with this power in their great work. They were going forth to preach to all nation; and though the Greek and Roman tongues were extensively spoken, yet their use was not universal, nor is it known that the apostles were skilled in those languages. To preach to all nations, it was indispensable that they should be able to understand their language. And in order that the gospel might be rapidly propagated through the earth, it was necessary that they should be endowed with ability to do this without the slow process of being compelled to learn them. It will contribute to illustrate this to remark that one of the principal hindrances in the spread of the gospel now arises from the inability to speak the languages of the nations of the earth, and that among missionaries of modern times a long time is necessarily spent in acquiring the language of a people before they are prepared to preach to them.

(5) one design was to establish the gospel by means of miracles. Yet no miracle could be more impressive than the power of conveying their sentiments at once in all the languages of the earth. When it is remembered what a slow and toilsome process it is to learn a foreign tongue, this would I be regarded by the pagan as one of the most striking miracles which could be performed, 1 Corinthians 14:22, 1 Corinthians 14:24-25.

(6) the reality and certainty of this miracle is strongly attested by the early triumphs of the gospel. That the gospel was early spread over all the world, and that, too, by the apostles of Jesus Christ, is the clear testimony of all history. They preached it in Arabia, Greece, Syria, Asia, Persia, Africa, and Rome. Yet how could this have been effected without a miraculous power of speaking the languages used in all those places? Now, it requires the toil of many years to speak in foreign languages; and the recorded success of the gospel is one of the most striking attestations to the fact of the miracle that could be conceived.

(7) the corruption of language was one of the most decided effects of sin, and the source of endless embarrassments and difficulties, Genesis 11:It is not to be regarded as wonderful that one of the effects of the plan of recovering people should be to show the power of God over all evil, and thus to furnish striking evidence that the gospel could meet all the crimes and calamities of people. And we may add,

(8) That from this we see the necessity now of training people who are to be missionaries to other lands. The gift of miracles is withdrawn. The apostles, by that miracle, simply were empowered to speak other languages. That power must still be had if the gospel is to be preached. But it is now to be obtained, not by miracle, but by stow and careful study and toil. If possessed, people must be taught it. And as the church is bound Matthew 28:19 to send the gospel to all nations, so it is bound to provide that the teachers who shall be sent forth shall be qualified for their work. Hence, one of the reasons of the importance of training men for the holy ministry.

5

Acts 2:5

Open passage

简体中文

住在耶路撒冷——译作"住"的词 κατοικοῦντες katoikountes,本义是指有固定而永久的居所,与另一个指在某地暂时寄居的词 παροικοῦντες paroikeountes 相区别。但这个词并不总是限于这个含义;不少富有的外邦犹太人为了靠近圣殿的便利,在耶路撒冷设有永久居所,这也是很有可能的。当时正值人们期待弥赛亚显现的时期(Matthew 2),这就更有可能了。

犹太人——指出身的犹太人,即具有犹太血统和犹太宗教的人。

虔诚人——ἀνδρες ἐυλαβεῖς andres eulabēis。按字面意思,指生活谨慎检点、行事有分辨的人。这词继而用于指小心不得罪神、谨守他诫命的人。因此它是表示虔诚或敬虔之人的常用语,如 Acts 8:2"有虔诚的人把司提反埋葬了";Luke 2:25"这人(西面)又公义又虔诚"。"虔诚"一词的意思是"在宗教的操练、特别是祷告中,以庄重敬畏之心归向神;敬虔、真诚、严肃"(Webster),很好地表达了原文的分量。

从天下各国来——这是一般的说法,意指从地上各方而来。他们所来自的国家在 Acts 2:9-11 中有更具体的列举。犹太人当时散居在几乎所有的国家,在各处都有会堂。参看 John 7:35 注释;James 1:1 注释;1 Peter 1:1 注释。即便如此,他们自然仍盼望尽可能常赴耶路撒冷参加民族的大节期。许多人为了便于参加宗教盛典,会设法在那里安置住所。许多上来过逾越节的人会留到五旬节。其结果是,每逢这样的时节,城中就挤满了外来的人。据载,当提图斯围困耶路撒冷时——这事恰发生在逾越节前后——城内人数不少于三百万。

Josephus 也提到一个事例:大批来自列国的犹太人聚集过五旬节(Jewish Wars, book 2, chapter 3, section 1)。这里所述当时发生的事,对今日耶路撒冷的居民——住在那里的四五千人——也同样真实。他们大部分来自国外。Hackett 教授(Illustrations of Scripture,第228、229页)论到他们说:"比较而言,他们中很少有本地出生的人。他们大多是年长的人,来到圣城度其余生,并要得着葬在汲沦谷的特权——按他们的传统所说,那里将是最后审判的场所。有一天,在犹太人的哀哭之所,我遇到一位可敬的老人,因年迈而佝偻,看去已过八十;他告诉我,他顺从责任感的驱使,撇下在英国的儿女和家园,不带一个朋友,只身前来耶路撒冷,要死在这里、葬在这里。他们中间另有一些人,是来还愿、或要得着朝圣之功德的,然后就回到所居住的国家去。在他们中间几乎可以找到来自各地的代表,不过西班牙、波兰和德国的犹太人占大多数。"

"除了几处商业地方之外,他们像巴勒斯坦其他地区的同胞一样穷困潦倒,主要靠欧美同胞的周济度日。他们把大部分时间用于他们所谓的圣事:常去会堂,漫游各地寻访古代史上的名胜,勤读旧约和拉比的著作。他们中间凡稍以学问自许的,都通晓希伯来文和拉比文,并把从前居住之地、或其祖辈移居来源之地的语言当作日常用语。"

English original

There were dwelling at Jerusalem - The word rendered "dwelling" - κατοικοῦντες katoikountes - properly means to have a fixed and permanent habitation, in distinction from another word - παροικοῦντες paroikeountes - which means to have a temporary and transient residence in a place. But it is not always confined to this signification; and it is not improbable that many wealthy foreign Jews had a permanent residence in Jerusalem for the convenience of being near the temple. This was the more probable, as about that time the Messiah was expected to appear, Matthew 2.

Jews - Jews by birth; of Jewish descent and religion.

Devout men - ἀνδρες ἐυλαβεῖς andres eulabēis. Literally, men of cautious and circumspect lives, or who lived in a prudent manner. The term is then applied to men who were cautious about offending God; who were careful to observe his commandments. It is hence a general expression to denote pious or religious men, Acts 8:2, "And devout men carried Stephen to his burial"; Luke 2:25," And the same man (Simeon) was just, and devout." The word "devout" means "yielding a solemn and reverential attention to God in religious exercises, particularly in prayer, pious, sincere, solemn" (Webster), and very well expresses the force of the original.

Out of every nation under heaven - A general expression meaning from all parts of the earth. The countries from which they came are more particularly specified in Acts 2:9-11. The Jews at that time were scattered into almost all nations, and in all places had synagogues. See the John 7:35 note; James 1:1 note; 1 Peter 1:1 note. Still they would naturally desire to be present as often as possible at the great feasts of the nation in Jerusalem. Many would seek a residence there for the convenience of being present at the religious solemnities. Many who came up to the Feast of the Passover would remain to the Feast of the Pentecost. The consequence of this would be, that on such occasions the city would be full of strangers. We are told that when Titus besieged Jerusalem, an event which occurred at about the time of the Feast of the Passover, there were no less than three million people in the city.

Josephus also mentions an instance in which great multitudes of Jews from other nations were present at the feast of Pentecost (Jewish Wars, book 2, chapter 3, section 1). What is here stated as occurring at that time is true of the inhabitants of Jerusalem - four or five thousand in number who reside there now. A large portion of them are from abroad. Prof. Hackett (Illustrations of Scripture, p. 228, 229) says of them, "Few of them, comparatively, are natives of the country. The majority of them are aged persons, who repair to the holy city to spend the remainder of their days and secure the privilege of being buried in the Valley of the Kedron, which, as their traditions assert, is to be the scene of the last judgment. At the Jews' Wailing Place one day I met a venerable man, bowed with age, apparently beyond 80, who told me that, in obedience to his sense of duty, he had forsaken his children and home in England, and had come, unattended by any friend, to die and make his grave at Jerusalem. Others of them are those who come here to fulfill a vow, or acquire the merit of a pilgrimage, and then return to the countries where they reside. Among them may be found representatives from almost every land, though the Spanish, Polish, and German Jews compose the greater number.

Like their brethren in other parts of Palestine, except a few in some commercial places, they are wretchedly poor, and live chiefly on alms contributed by their countrymen in Europe and America. They devote most of their time to holy employments, as they are called; they frequent the synagogues, roam over the country to visit places memorable in their ancient history, and read assiduously the Old Testament and the writings of their rabbis. Those of them who make any pretensions to learning understand the Hebrew and rabbinic, and speak as their vernacular tongue the language of the country where they formerly lived, or whence their fathers emigrated."

6

Acts 2:6

Open passage

简体中文

这声音一响——即这件大事的风声传开的时候,这自然会引起轰动。

都甚纳闷——συνεχύθη sunechuthē。这里所用的词,字面意思是"混浇在一起",引申为"使混乱、使惶惑"。它用于:

(a)陷入混乱的集会或群众(Acts 21:27);

(b)如辩论中那样困惑迷乱的心思(Acts 9:22);

(c)如本节这样,处于惊奇惶恐中的人。他们不明白这事,也无法解释。

各人听见……——众人虽然语言各不相同,如今却听见加利利人说他们在外邦所学的话。"众人的乡谈"即各人自己的方言——διαλέκτῳ dialektō,各人固有的语调,无论是外国语,还是希伯来语的变体。这个词两义皆可;但旅居外邦的犹太人大概把希伯来语改变甚多,或几乎完全随从所居之地通行的语言。这里我们可以注意,圣灵降临的这一功效并非那个时代所独有。宗教复兴中临到人心的恩典之工,总会"传扬出去";众人会聚集起来,而神常像在这里一样,利用这种动机使人落在宗教的影响之下。这一次的动机是好奇,而这好奇成了他们被带到真理权下、悔改归主的契机。此后千万次发生过同样的事。他们所见之事的效应,是使他们惶惑、惊异、深陷迷惘。起初他们并不抱怨这事有何不合常规,而是全都惊讶不已。照样,宗教复兴的功效,常使众人确信这实在是圣者的工作,以他能力的彰显使他们惊异,并以神明显的同在和大能使反对和挑剔止息。后来有少数人开始挑剔(Acts 2:13),复兴中总会有这样的人;但大多数人确信这是神大能的有力彰显——以后也必如此。

English original

When this was noised abroad - When the rumor of this remarkable transaction was spread, as it naturally would be.

Were confounded - συνεχύθη sunechuthē̄. The word used here means literally "to pour together," hence, "to confound, confuse." It is used:

(a) of an assembly or multitude thrown into confusion, Acts 21:27;

(b) of the mind as perplexed or confounded, as in disputation, Acts 9:22; and,

(c) of persons in amazement or consternation, as in this place. They did not understand this; they could not account for it.

Every man heard them speak ... - Though the multitude spoke different tongues, yet they now heard Galileans use the language which they had learned in foreign nations. "His own language." His own dialect - διαλέκτῳ dialektō. His own idiom, whether it was a foreign language, or whether it was a modification of the Hebrew. The word may mean either; but it is probable that the foreign Jews would greatly modify the Hebrew, or conform almost entirely to the language spoken in the country where they lived. We may remark here that this effect of the descent of the Holy Spirit was not special to that time. A work of grace on the hearts of people in a revival of religion will always "be noised abroad." A multitude will come together, and God often, as he did here, makes use of this motive to bring them under the influence of religion. Curiosity was the motive here, and it was the occasion of their being brought under the power of truth, and of their conversion. In thousands of cases this has occurred since. The effect of what they saw was to confound them, to astonish them, and to throw them into deep perplexity. They made no complaint at first of the irregularity of what was done, but were all amazed and overwhelmed. So the effect of a revival of religion is often to convince the multitude that it is indeed a work of the Holy One; to amaze them by the display of his power; and to silence opposition and cavil by the manifest presence and the power of God. A few afterward began to cavil Acts 2:13, as some will always do in a revival; but the mass were convinced, as will be the case always, that this was a mighty display of the power of God.

7

Acts 2:7

Open passage

简体中文

加利利人——即加利利的居民。他们竟能这样说话,实在令人惊奇,原因如下:

(1)他们无知、粗野、没有教化(John 1:46)。因此,“加利利人”一词被人用作极深的鄙夷与轻蔑之称(Mark 14:70;John 7:52)。

(2)他们的方言素以粗鄙不纯著称(Mark 14:70;Matthew 26:73)。他们被视为一个粗野闭塞的民族,不熟悉别国的民情与语言;因此,他们竟能以他国文雅的语言向人讲话,就令人诧异。他们天生的无知,反倒使这神迹更加突出。基督教传道人天生的软弱,使神的恩典与荣耀在福音的成就上更显分明。“我们有这宝贝放在瓦器里,要显明这莫大的能力是出于神,不是出于我们”(2 Corinthians 4:7)。神常常赐福给那些恩赐平常、学问浅薄、却怀谦卑敬虔之心的人,使他们大有成就,这往往令世人惊讶。神“拣选了世上愚拙的,叫有智慧的羞愧”(1 Corinthians 1:27)。这当教训我们:在基督的国度里,任何才干或造诣,无论多么微末,只要用在合宜的位置上,都可成就大事工;敬虔的努力可以大有成就,并在天上永远发出愈发辉煌的光芒;而骄傲、学问与才华,却可能在人间无益地燃烧一时,随后熄灭在永恒的黑夜里。

English original

Galileans - Inhabitants of Galilee. It was remarkable that they should speak in this manner, because:

(1) They were ignorant, rude, and uncivilized, John 1:46. Hence, the term Galilean was used as an expression of the deepest reproach and contempt, Mark 14:70; John 7:52.

(2) Their dialect was proverbially barbarous and corrupt, Mark 14:70; Matthew 26:73. They were regarded as an outlandish people, unacquainted with other nations and languages, and hence, the amazement that they could address them in the refined language of other people. Their native ignorance was the occasion of making the miracle more striking. The native weakness of Christian ministers makes the grace and glory of God more remarkable in the success of the gospel. "We have this treasure in earthen vessels, that the excellency of the power may be of God, and not of us," 2 Corinthians 4:7. The success which God often grants to those who are of slender endowments and of little learning, though blessed with an humble and pious heart, is often amazing to the people of the world. God has "chosen the foolish things of the world to confound the wise," 1 Corinthians 1:27. This should teach us that no talent or attainment is too humble to be employed for mighty purposes, in its proper sphere, in the kingdom of Christ; and that pious effort may accomplish much, and then burn in heaven with increasing luster for ever, while pride, and learning, and talent may blaze uselessly among people, and then be extinguished in eternal night.

8

Acts 2:8

Open passage

简体中文

生来所用的乡谈——即如我们所说,用我们本地的语言;就是我们出生之地所说的话。

English original

Wherein we were born - That is, as we say, in our native language; what is spoken where we were born.

9

Acts 2:9

Open passage

简体中文

帕提亚人……——为显明这神迹惊人的范围与能力,路加列举了当时在耶路撒冷的各个民族。这样,使徒所说语言的数目、以及神迹的范围,便可以确定。这列举从东方开始,向西推进。帕提亚人指住在帕提亚的犹太人或归信犹太教的人。这地方是波斯的一部分,西起波斯湾与底格里斯河,东抵印度河。“帕提亚”一词原本指米底亚东北一个多山的小区,后来用来指由这省扩展而成的帕提亚大国。帕提亚本土,或古帕提亚,位于亚细亚与希尔卡尼亚之间,是一个粗野贫穷部族的居地,境内尽是秃山、丛林与沙质草原,原属波斯大帝国的组成部分。其居民源于西古提人。约在基督前二百五十六年,阿萨息斯起而反抗叙利-马其顿的势力,以其本人开创了新王朝,称为阿萨息斯王朝。这就是帕提亚大帝国的开端;在基督教初期的年代,它扩展到波斯王国旧日的各省,西界幼发拉底河,与罗马的领土相隔(Kitto 百科辞典)。他们的帝国延续约四百年。帕提亚人作战的方式极为著名。他们通常骑马作战,在看似撤退之时,向身后放箭,杀伤力极大。他们长久与罗马人争夺东方的霸权。当地所说的语言是波斯语;在古代作家笔下,帕提亚与波斯常指同一国。

玛代人——即米底亚的居民。这地方位于里海以西和以南,在北纬三十五度至四十度之间。南接波斯,西连亚美尼亚。它面积约与西班牙相等,是亚细亚最富庶的地区之一。圣经中称之为玛代(Genesis 10:2)。玛代人常被提及,且常与波斯人并提,因他们屡屡同属一个政府(2 Kings 17:6;2 Kings 18:11;Esther 1:3、1:14、1:18-19;Jeremiah 25:25;Daniel 5:28;Daniel 6:8;Daniel 8:20;Daniel 9:1)。当地所说的语言也是波斯语。

以拦人——以拦在旧约中常被提及。这民族出自闪的儿子以拦(Genesis 10:22)。圣经提到它与示拿王暗拉非、以拉撒王亚略、戈印王提达结盟(Genesis 14:1)。在这结盟的诸国中,以拦王基大老玛为首(Genesis 14:4)。另见 Ezra 2:7;Ezra 8:7;Nehemiah 7:12、7:34;Isaiah 11:11;Isaiah 21:2;Isaiah 22:6 等。他们被提及为波斯帝国的一部分;但以理据说曾住在书珊城,那城在以拦省(Daniel 8:2)。希腊人与罗马人称这地为以利麦斯,今称库齐斯坦。它东接波斯,北连米底亚,西邻巴比伦,南临波斯湾。以拦人是好战的民族,以善用弓箭闻名(Isaiah 22:6;Jeremiah 49:35)。这民族的语言当然是波斯语。其首都书珊,希腊人称为苏萨,极负盛名。据说该城周长十五里,并有亚哈随鲁著名的宫殿为装饰。当地居民至今仍声称能在那里指认先知但以理的坟墓。

米所波大米——这名字是希腊文,意为“两河之间”,即幼发拉底河与底格里斯河之间的地区。希伯来文称之为两河的亚兰,即“两河的亚兰(叙利亚)”。它又称巴旦亚兰,即叙利亚平原。圣经所记的一些重要地点位于这地区:迦勒底的吾珥,亚伯拉罕的出生地(Genesis 11:27-28);哈兰,他拉旅途中停留并死在那里(Genesis 11:31-32);迦基米施(2 Chronicles 35:20);希拿(2 Kings 19:13);西法瓦音(2 Kings 17:24)。这称为米所波大米的地区,介于两河之间,从其发源之地向南延伸到巴比伦。北接亚美尼亚,西连叙利亚,东邻波斯,南接巴比伦。这是一片辽阔、平坦而肥沃的土地。当地所说的语言大概是叙利亚语,或许掺杂迦勒底语。

在犹太——这一说法令解经家大为困惑。他们觉得难以明白,为什么犹太也被提及,仿佛他们会说这语言是件奇事。有人认为抄本有误,提议读作亚美尼亚、印度、吕底亚或以东等。但这一切都没有任何根据。另有人认为,加利利语与犹太其余地区的语言差异甚大,以致他们能说那方言便显得特别。但这是无谓的臆测。这是解经家自寻烦恼却一无所获的诸多例子之一。路加记录此事,正如任何史家都会做的一样。他在历数他们所说的语言时,自然把这一项也列上;不是说他们会说犹太地的语言本身有何奇特,而是说他们会说这么多语言;其用意大致等于说,他们说了世上一切的语言。这就好比今天在一群本地英国人和外国人聚会的场合发生类似的神迹。描述这事时,再自然不过的说法就是:他们说了法语、德语、西班牙语、英语、意大利语等。其中并无任何奇特之处,除了他们会说这么多语言。

加帕多家——这是小亚细亚的一个地区,东以幼发拉底河和亚美尼亚为界,北接本都,西连弗里吉亚和加拉太,南邻托罗斯山,山那边就是基利家和叙利亚。当地所说的语言不能确定,不过大概是混合的方言,由希腊语和叙利亚语组成,也许与其邻人吕高尼人所说的相同(Acts 14:11)。这地方先前以罪恶著称,希腊作家把它列为以 C 开头、显著邪恶的三个地方之一;其余两处是革哩底(比对 Titus 1:12)和基利家。然而它归信基督教以后,出了许多杰出人物,其中有尼撒的贵格利和大巴西流。这是彼得写信的对象之一(1 Peter 1:1)。

本都——这是小亚细亚的另一个省,位于加帕多家以北,西接帕夫拉哥尼亚。在罗马人治下,本都与加帕多家合为一省。这也是使徒彼得写信的对象之一(1 Peter 1:1)。这是亚居拉的出生地;亚居拉是保罗的同工之一(Acts 18:2、18:18、18:26;Romans 16:3;1 Corinthians 16:19;2 Timothy 4:19)。

亚细亚——本都、加帕多家等都是亚细亚的一部分。但“亚细亚”一词在此无疑用来指这些地方以西的地区或省份,那里未一一细数。它是这样使用的:Acts 6:9;Acts 16:6;Acts 20:16。它大概包括每西亚、爱欧利斯、爱奥尼亚、加利亚和吕底亚。“这个词与其说指一个确定的地区,不如说指一个管辖范围,其疆界随罗马人对亚细亚诸省所采政制的不同而时有变动”(Hackett 教授就本处的注)。这地区的首府是以弗所。另见 1 Peter 1:1。这地区常被称为爱奥尼亚,后来成为亚细亚七教会的所在地(Revelation 1:4)。

English original

Parthians ... - To show the surprising extent and power of this miracle, Luke enumerates the different nations that were represented then at Jerusalem. In this way the number of languages which the apostles spoke, and the extent of the miracle, can be ascertained. The enumeration of these nations begins at the east and proceeds to the west. Parthians mean those Jews or proselytes who dwelt in Parthia. This country was a part of Persia, and was situated between the Persian Gulf and the Tigris on the west, and the Indus River on the east. The term "Parthia" originally referred to a small mountainous district lying to the northeast of Media. Afterward it came to be applied to the great Parthian kingdom into which this province expanded. Parthia proper, or Ancient Parthia, lying between Asia and Hyrcania, the residence of a rude and poor tribe, and traversed by bare mountains, woods, and sandy steppes, formed a part of the great Persian monarchy. Its inhabitants were of Scythian origin. About 256 years before Christ, Arsaces rose against the Syro-Macedonian power, and commenced a new dynasty in her own person, designated by the title of Arsacidae. This was the beginning of the great Parthian empire, which extended itself in the early days of Christianity over all the provinces of what had been the Persian kingdom, having the Euphrates for its western boundary, by which it was separated from the dominions of Rome (Kitto's Encyclop.). Their empire lasted about 400 years. The Parthians were much distinguished for their manner of fighting. They usually fought on horseback, and when appearing to retreat, discharged their arrows with great execution behind them. They disputed the empire of the East with the Romans for a long time. The language spoken there was that of Persia, and in ancient writers Parthia and Persia often mean the same country.

Medes - Inhabitants of Media. This country was situated westward and southward of the Caspian Sea, between 35 degrees and 40 degrees of north latitude. It had Persia on the south and Armenia on the west. It was about the size of Spain, and was one of the richest parts of Asia. In the Scriptures it is called Madai, Genesis 10:2. The Medes are often mentioned, frequently in connection with the Persians, with whom they were often connected under the same government, 2 Kings 17:6; 2 Kings 18:11; Esther 1:3, Esther 1:14, Esther 1:18-19; Jeremiah 25:25; Daniel 5:28; Daniel 6:8; Daniel 8:20; Daniel 9:1. The language spoken here was also that of Persia.

Elamites - Elam is often mentioned in the Old Testament. The nation was descended from Elam, the son of Shem, Genesis 10:22. It is mentioned as being in alliance with Amraphel, the king of Shinar, and Arioch, king of Ellasar, and Tidal, king of nations, Genesis 14:1. Of these nations in alliance, Chedorlaomer, king of Elam, was the chief, Genesis 14:4. See also Ezra 2:7; Ezra 8:7; Nehemiah 7:12, Nehemiah 7:34; Isaiah 11:11; Isaiah 21:2; Isaiah 22:6, etc. They are mentioned as a part of the Persian empire, and Daniel is said to have resided at Shushan, which is in the province of Elam, Daniel 8:2. The Greeks and Romans gave to this country the name of Elymais. It is now called Kusistan. It was bounded by Persia on the east, by Media on the north, by Babylonia on the west, and by the Persian Gulf on the south. The Elamites were a warlike people, and celebrated for the use of the bow, Isaiah 22:6; Jeremiah 49:35. The language of this people was of course the Persian. Its capital, Shusan, called by the Greeks Susa, was much celebrated. It is said to have been fifteen miles in circumference, and was adorned with the celebrated palace of Ahasuerus. The inhabitants still pretend to show there the tomb of the prophet Daniel.

Mesopotamia - This name, which is Greek, signifies between the rivers; that is, the region lying between the rivers Euphrates and Tigris. In Hebrew it was called Aram-Naharaim; that is, Aram, or Syria, of the two rivers. It was also called Padan Aram, the plain of Syria. In this region were situated some important places mentioned in the Bible: "Ur of the Chaldees, the birthplace of Abraham Genesis 11:27-28; Haran, where Terah stopped on his journey and died Genesis 11:31-32; Charchemish 2 Chronicles 35:20; Hena 2 Kings 19:13; Sepharvaim 2 Kings 17:24. This region, known as Mesopotamia, extended between the two rivers from their sources to Babylon on the south. It had on the north Armenia, on the west Syria, on the east Persia, and on the south Babylonia. It was an extensive, level, and fertile country. The language spoken here was probably the Syriac, with perhaps a mixture of the Chaldee.

In Judea - This expression has greatly perplexed commentators. It has been thought difficult to see why Judea should be mentioned, as if it were a matter of surprise that they could speak in this language. Some have supposed that there is an error in the manuscripts, and have proposed to read Armenia, or India, or Lydia, or Idumea, etc. But all this has been without any authority. Others have supposed that the language of Galilee was so different from that of the other parts of Judea as to render it remarkable that they could speak that dialect. But this is an idle supposition. This is one of the many instances in which commentators have perplexed themselves to very little purpose. Luke recorded this as any other historian would have done. In running over the languages which they spoke, he enumerated this as a matter of course; not that it was remarkable simply that they should speak the language of Judea, but that they should steak so many, meaning about the same by it as if he had said they spoke every language in the world. It is as if a similar miracle were to occur at this time among an assembly of native Englishmen and foreigners. In describing it, nothing would be more natural than to say they spoke French, and German, and Spanish, and English, and Italian, etc. In this there would be nothing remarkable except that they spoke so many languages.

Cappadocia - This was a region of Asia Minor, and was bounded on the east by the Euphrates and Armenia, on the north by Pontus, west by Phrygia and Galatia, and south by Mount Taurus, beyond which are Cilicia and Syria. The language which was spoken here is not certainly known. It was probably, however, a mixed dialect, made up of Greek and Syriac, perhaps the same as that of their neighbors, the Lycaonians, Acts 14:11. This place was formerly celebrated for iniquity, and is mentioned in Greek writers as one of the three eminently wicked places whose name began with C. The others were Crete (compare Titus 1:12) and Cilicia. After its conversion to the Christian religion, however, it produced many eminent men, among whom were Gregory Nyssen and Basil the Great. It was one of the places to which Peter directed an epistle, 1 Peter 1:1.

In Pontus - This was another province of Asia Minor, and was situated north of Cappadocia, and was bounded west by Paphlagonia. Pontus and Cappadocia under the Romans constituted one province. This was one of the places to which the apostle Peter directed his epistle, 1 Peter 1:1. This was the birthplace of Aquila, one of the companions of Paul, Acts 18:2, Acts 18:18, Acts 18:26; Romans 16:3; 1 Corinthians 16:19; 2 Timothy 4:19.

And Asia - Pontus and Cappadocia, etc., were parts of Asia. But the word Asia is doubtless used here to denote the regions or provinces west of these, which are not particularly enumerated. Thus, it is used Acts 6:9; Acts 16:6; Acts 20:16. It probably embraced Mysia, Aeolis, Ionia, Caria, and Lydia. "The term probably denoted not so much a definite region as a jurisdiction, the limits of which varied from time to time, according to the plan of government which the Romans adopted for their Asiatic provinces" (Prof. Hackett, in loco). The capital of this region was Ephesus. See also 1 Peter 1:1. This region was frequently called Ionia, and was afterward the seat of the seven churches in Asia, Revelation 1:4.

10

Acts 2:10

Open passage

简体中文

弗吕家、旁非利亚——这也是小亚细亚的两个省。弗吕家四周为加拉太、加帕多家和皮西底亚所环。旁非利亚位于地中海边,北接皮西底亚。所有这些地方的语言,无疑是希腊语,或较纯或较不纯。

埃及——这是那广为人知的大国,位于地中海以南,有尼罗河灌溉。南北绵延六百里,东西宽约一百至一百二十里。当地所用的语言是科普特语;如今说的是阿拉伯语。极多的犹太人住在埃及,许多来自那国的人会上耶路撒冷守大节。旧约的第一个译本就是在那国完成的,即如今所称的七十士译本。

吕彼亚……一带——吕彼亚是非洲的通称。它本指邻近埃及的地区;但希腊人把这名字给了整个非洲。

古利奈一带——这是埃及亚力山太以西约五百里的一个地区。它又称五城地区,因其中有五座著名的城。这地区今日属的黎波里。极多的犹太人住在这里。这地方的一个犹太人,名叫西门,曾被强逼背着救主的十字架跟随他到钉十字架之处(Matthew 27:32;Luke 23:26)。一些古利奈人也在最早的基督徒中被提及(Acts 11:20;Acts 13:1)。他们所说的语言不能确定。

罗马来的——直译是“旅居的罗马人”,即在耶路撒冷居住或客居的——οἰ ἐπιδημοῦντες Ῥωμαῖοι hoi epidēmōuntes Rōmaioi。这话或指他们长住耶路撒冷,或只在耶路撒冷客居。他们无疑是在意大利定居、来到耶路撒冷守大节的犹太人。他们所说的语言是拉丁语。当时有极多犹太人住在罗马。Josephus 说那里有八所会堂。罗马作家常提到犹太人。罗马的台伯河对岸有一个犹太殖民区。犹太国约在基督前六十年被征服时,大批犹太人被掳到罗马。但罗马人很难把他们当奴隶管理。他们顽固持守自己的宗教,谨守安息日,拒绝参与罗马人的偶像敬拜之礼。因此他们得了释放,住在台伯河对岸,自成一区。

犹太人——生来的犹太人,或犹太家庭的后裔。

进犹太教的人——指从外邦人中归信犹太教的人。犹太人极力拉人入教的热心,我们的救主曾作为法利赛人的特征之一特别提及(Matthew 23:15)。有人以为“犹太人和进犹太教的人”一语仅指罗马人。但更可能是指所提到的所有人。这列举看似仓促;作者显然是随意想到便记下,正如我们要快速述说这么多不同民族时也会如此。

English original

Phrygia, and Pamphylia - These were also two provinces of Asia Minor. Phrygia was surrounded by Galatia, Cappadocia, and Pisidia. Pamphylia was on the Mediterranean, and was bounded north by Pisidia. The language of all these places was doubtless the Greek, more or less pure.

In Egypt - This was that extensive country, well known, on the south of the Mediterranean, watered by the Nile. It extends 600 miles from north to south, and from 100 to 120 miles east and west. The language used there was the Coptic tongue. At present the Arabic is spoken. Vast numbers of Jews dwelt in Egypt, and many from that country would be present at the great feasts at Jerusalem. In this country the first translation of the Old Testament was made, which is now called the Septuagint.

In the parts of Libya - Libya is a general name for Africa. It properly denoted the region which was near to Egypt; but the Greeks gave the name to all Africa.

About Cyrene - This was a region about 500 miles west of Alexandria in Egypt. It was also called Pentapolis, because there were in it five celebrated cities. This country now belongs to Tripoli. Great numbers of Jews resided here. A Jew of this place, Simon by name, was compelled to bear our Saviour's cross after him to the place of crucifixion, Matthew 27:32; Luke 23:26. Some of the Cyrenians are mentioned among the earliest Christians, Acts 11:20; Acts 13:1. The language which they spoke is not certainly known.

Strangers of Rome - This literally means "Romans dwelling or tarrying," that is, at Jerusalem. It may mean either that they were permanently fixed, or only tarrying at Jerusalem - ὁι ἐπιδημοῦντες Ῥωμαῖοι hoi epidēmōuntes Rōmaioi. They were doubtless Jews who had taken up their residence in Italy, and had come to Jerusalem to attend the great feasts. The language which they spoke was the Latin. Great numbers of Jews were at that time dwelling at Rome. Josephus says that there were eight synagogues there. The Jews are often mentioned by the Roman writers. There was a Jewish colony across the Tiber from Rome. When Judea was conquered, about 60 years before Christ, vast numbers of Jews were taken captive and carried to Rome. But they had much difficulty in managing them as slaves. They pertinaciously adhered to their religion, observed the Sabbath, and refused to join in the idolatrous rites of the Romans. Hence, they were freed, and lived by themselves across the Tiber.

Jews - Native-born Jews, or descendants of Jewish families.

Proselytes - Those who had been converted to the Jewish religion from among the Gentiles. The great zeal of the Jews to make proselytes is mentioned by our Saviour as one of the special characteristics of the Pharisees, Matthew 23:15. Some have supposed that the expression "Jews and proselytes" refers to the Romans only. But it is more probable that reference is made to all those that are mentioned. It has the appearance of a hurried enumeration; and the writer evidently mentioned them as they occurred to his mind, just as we would in giving a rapid account of so many different nations.

11

Acts 2:11

Open passage

简体中文

革哩底人——革哩底,今称坎迪亚,是地中海的一座岛,长约二百里,宽约五十里,位于君士坦丁堡西南约五百里,距叙利亚或巴勒斯坦以西约同等的距离。气候温和宜人,天空无云晴朗。有人以为这岛就是希伯来人的迦斐托(Genesis 10:14)。使徒行传提到保罗曾途经此地(Acts 27:7-8、27:13)。这是提多的居所,保罗把他留在那里,“将那没有办完的事办整齐”(Titus 1:5)等。革哩底人在希腊人中以欺诈虚谎闻名。见 Titus 1:12-13 的注释。当地所说的语言大概是希腊语。

亚拉伯人——亚拉伯是那个大半岛,北接叙利亚一部,东邻幼发拉底河与波斯湾,南临印度洋,西濒红海。圣经中常提到它;那里无疑有许多犹太人。当地所说的是亚拉伯语。

讲说——使徒们所说的语言,加上同一种语言的各方言,不会少于七八种。来自外邦的犹太人是否说得完美,并不能确定;但无疑他们已惯于使用这些语言,使之成为他们交谈的通用语言。再没有比这更明确的神迹了。使徒们若真不会说外国语,便无法欺哄他们、使他们以为自己会说;因为这些外国人完全有能力作出判断。可以留意,这神迹除了五旬节当日所见的果效之外,还有极重要的后续影响。福音将被这些归信的人带到所有这些地方,为使徒日后的劳苦预备道路。果然,这些地方大多数后来都因基督教会的建立以及大批人归信基督教而闻名。

神的大作为——τὰ μεγαλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ ta megaleia tou Theou,即神的大事;就是神在赐下他儿子、叫他从死里复活、他的神迹与升天等事上所成就的大事。比对 Luke 1:49;Psalm 71:19;Psalm 26:7;Psalm 66:3;Psalm 92:5;Psalm 104:24 等。

English original

Cretes - Crete, now called Candia, is an island in the Mediterranean, about 200 miles in length and 50 in breadth, about 500 miles southwest of Constantinople, and about the same distance west of Syria or Palestine. The climate is mild and delightful, the sky unclouded and serene. By some this island is supposed to be the Caphtor of the Hebrews, Genesis 10:14. It is mentioned in the Acts as the place touched at by Paul, Acts 27:7-8, Acts 27:13. This was the residence of Titus, who was left there by Paul" to set in order the things that were missing," etc., Titus 1:5. The Cretans among the Greeks were famous for deceit and falsehood. See the notes on Titus 1:12-13. The language spoken there was probably the Greek.

Arabians - Arabia is the great peninsula which is bounded north by part of Syria, east by the Euphrates and the Persian Gulf, south by the Indian Ocean, and west by the Red Sea. It is often mentioned in the Scriptures; and there were doubtless there many Jews. The language spoken there was the Arabic.

In our tongues - The languages spoken by the apostles could not have been less than seven or eight, besides different dialects of the same languages. It is not certain that the Jews present from foreign nations spoke those languages perfectly, but they had doubtless so used them as to make them the common tongue in which they conversed. No miracle could be more decided than this. There was no way in which the apostles could impose on them, and make them suppose they spoke foreign languages, if they really did not; for these foreigners were abundantly able to determine that. It may be remarked that this miracle had most important effects besides that witnessed on the day of Pentecost. The gospel would be carried by those who were converted to all these places, and the way would be prepared for the labors of the apostles there. Accordingly, most of these places became afterward celebrated by the establishment of Christian churches and the conversion of great multitudes to the Christian faith.

The wonderful works of God - τὰ μεγαλεία τοῦ Θεοῦ ta megaleia tou Theou. The great things of God; that is, the great things that God had done in the gift of his Son; in raising him from the dead; in his miracles, ascension, etc. Compare Luke 1:49; Psalm 71:19; Psalm 26:7; Psalm 66:3; Psalm 92:5; Psalm 104:24; etc.

12

Acts 2:12

Open passage

简体中文

惊讶猜疑——διηπόρουν diēporoun 一词,指“对一件事犹疑或焦虑的状态”。它用于行路而不识途、或在路上踌躇的人。众人都因这事惊异;他们不知道如何理解或解释,直到有人以为那不过是新酒的效果。

English original

Were in doubt - This expression, διηπόρουν diēporoun, denotes "a state of hesitancy or anxiety about an event." It is applied to those who are traveling, and are ignorant of the way, or who hesitate about the road. They were all astonished at this; they did not know how to understand it or explain it, until some of them supposed that it was merely the effect of new wine.

13

Acts 2:13

Open passage

简体中文

还有人讥诮说——译作“讥诮”的词,意思是“挑剔、嘲弄”。这词在新约中只另外出现一处:Acts 17:32,“众人听见从死里复活的话,就有讥诮他的”。这并不是五旬节那天独有的结果。宗教的复兴、圣灵能力显著的彰显,很少有不给不敬的嘲笑和戏笑提供机会的。恶人的一项特征,就是讥诮那些为增进他们自身福祉而作的事。因此,救主自己曾受嘲弄;基督徒为拯救他人所作的努力,也一直是被嗤笑的对象。嗤笑、嘲弄和讥讽,在拦阻人成为基督徒这件事上,远比任何冷静论证的尝试更加有效。神必照人待他的方式待人,Psalm 18:26。因此他对恶人说:“我呼唤,你们不肯听从……你们轻弃我一切的劝戒,不肯受我的责备。遭难的日子,我就发笑;惊恐临到你们,我必嗤笑”,Proverbs 1:24-26。

这些人是被新酒灌满了——意思就是:这些人醉了。在宗教复兴的时候,人总会有某种解释福音果效的说法,而这说法通常与这一次所采用的同样“智慧”、同样“合理”。“为了逃避承认自己无知的荒谬,他们采纳了烈酒能教人语言的理论”(McLelland 博士)。近代的惯常做法,是把这样的场面称为狂热、野火或热狂。人在论证上失败时,通常会试图借“给它起个坏名字”来驳倒一个教义,或败坏一件事的名声。因此,Puritan(清教徒)、Quaker(贵格会信徒)、Methodist(循道宗信徒)等名称,起初也是以嘲弄的口吻加上的,为要解释宗教在世上产生的某种显著果效。比较 Matthew 11:19; John 7:20; John 8:48。人就这样试图把复兴归于失控而狂热的情绪,把它们仅仅看作狂热的产物。复兴之友不应因此灰心;他们倒要记得,宗教的第一次复兴本身,就被许多人以为是酒后闹事的结果。

新酒——γλεύκους gleukous。这词的本义,指葡萄在受压榨之前自然流出的汁液,称为 must。那是甜酒,因此希腊文中意为“甜”的词便成了它的名字。据说古人有技术,能把带特殊风味、尚未发酵的新酒保存相当长的时间,并且习惯在早晨饮用。见贺拉斯《讽刺诗集》第2卷第4篇。希腊人和罗马人所用的方法之一如下:取一只双耳瓶或坛子,里外都涂上沥青,然后盛入葡萄未经充分踩踏之前流出的汁液,再加以密封,使之不透空气。然后把它浸入冷水池中,或埋在沙里,放置六周或两个月。经过这过程之后,里面的酒被发现可以一年不变,因此得了 ἀεί γλεύκος aei gleukos——“常甜”——之名。这过程与今日保存水果和蔬菜的常见作法相差无几。大概与此处所提相同的甜酒,在旧约中也有提及,Isaiah 49:26; Amos 9:13。

English original

Others, mocking, said - The word rendered "mocking" means "to cavil, to deride." It occurs in the New Testament in only one other place: Acts 17:32, "And when they heard of the resurrection of the dead, some mocked." This was an effect that was not confined to the day of Pentecost. There has seldom been a revival of religion, a remarkable manifestation of the power of the Holy Spirit, that has not given occasion for profane mockery and merriment. One characteristic of wicked people is to deride those things which are done to promote their own welfare. Hence, the Saviour himself was mocked; and the efforts of Christians to save others have been the subject of derision. Derision, and mockery, and a jeer, have been far more effectual in deterring people from becoming Christians than any attempts at sober argument. God will treat people as they treat him, Psalm 18:26. And hence, he says to the wicked, "Because I have called and ye refused ...but ye have set at naught my counsel; I also will laugh at your calamity, I will mock when your fear cometh," Proverbs 1:24-26.

These men are full of new wine - These men are drunk. In times of a revival of religion men will have some way of accounting for the effects of the gospel, and the way is commonly about as wise and rational as the one adopted on this occasion. "To escape the absurdity of acknowledging their own ignorance, they adopted the theory that strong drink can teach languages" (Dr. McLelland). In modern times it has been usual to denominate such scenes fanaticism, or wildfire, or enthusiasm. When people fail in argument, it is common to attempt to confute a doctrine or bring reproach upon a transaction by "giving it an ill name." Hence, the names Puritan, Quaker, Methodist, etc., were at first given in derision, to account for some remarkable effect of religion on the world. Compare Matthew 11:19; John 7:20; John 8:48. And thus people endeavor to trace revivals to ungoverned and heated passions, and they are regarded as the mere offspring of fanaticism. The friends of revivals should not be discouraged by this; but they should remember that the very first revival of religion was by many supposed to be the effect of a drunken frolic.

New wine - γλεύκους gleukous. This word properly means the juice of the grape which distils before a pressure is applied, and called must. It was sweet wine, and hence, the word in Greek meaning "sweet" was given to it. The ancients, it is said, had the art of preserving their new wine with the special flavor before fermentation for a considerable time, and were in the habit of drinking it in the morning. See Horace, Sat., b. 2:iv. One of the methods in use among the Greeks and Romans of doing this was the following: An amphora or jar was taken and coated with pitch within and without, and was then filled with the juice which flowed from the grapes before they had been fully trodden, and was then corked so as to be air-tight. It was then immersed in a tank of cold water or buried in the sand, and allowed to remain six weeks or two months. The contents after this process were found to remain unchanged for a year, and hence, the name ἀεί γλεύκος aei gleukos - always sweet. The process was not much unlike what is so common now of preserving fruits and vegetables. Sweet wine, which was probably the same as that mentioned here, is also mentioned in the Old Testament, Isaiah 49:26; Amos 9:13.

14

Acts 2:14

Open passage

简体中文

彼得……站起来——这与彼得天生的气质相符。他大胆、率直、热忱;此刻他起来,为耶稣基督的使徒、并为基督自己,驳斥那加害于他们的指控。他不因讥笑或反对而气馁,只感到如今正是向这群因好奇而聚集的人传福音的时候。任何讥笑都不该拦阻基督徒诚实地表明自己的见解,并为圣灵的作为辩护。

和十一个使徒——马提亚如今已是使徒之一,此刻也作为真理的见证人之一出现。他们大概都站起来,一同参与这讲论。也许是彼得先开始讲,然后众人或者以不同的语言一同讲,或者相继而讲。

犹太人哪——指犹太人,就是生来的犹太人。原文并不是说他们是犹太地的永久居民,而是说他们是犹太人,出于犹太家族。字面意思是“各位,犹太人”。

和一切住在耶路撒冷的人哪——指生来犹太人以外的一切人,无论是归信犹太教者还是客旅,当时正住在耶路撒冷。这当然包括了全体会众,是他讲论的一个恭敬而和睦的开场。他们虽然讥诮过使徒,他却以恭敬待他们,不以辱骂还辱骂,1 Peter 3:9,反而力求使他们信服自己的错误。

你们当知道……——彼得并没有暗示这是一件可疑的事,或一件无法解释的事。他的话恭敬而坚定。他从容地着手向他们指明其错误。当宗教的仇敌讥笑我们或福音时,我们当以仁爱恭敬、却又坚定地回答他们;当冷静地与他们讲理,使他们信服其错,Proverbs 15:1。在这事上,彼得遵行了他后来吩咐众人的原则,1 Peter 3:15:“有人问你们心中盼望的缘由,就要常作准备,以温柔、敬畏的心回答各人。”彼得的用意,是要使徒的行为摆脱醉酒的羞辱,要表明这除了是神的作为别无可能,并把这真理应用于他的听众。他这样作:

(1) 表明这事不能被合理地看作新酒的效果,Acts 2:15。

(2) 表明所发生的事,在犹太先知的著作中已被明确预言,Acts 2:16-21。

(3) 以从容的论证,证明基督的复活与升天,并表明这也与犹太圣经相符,Acts 2:22-35。我们不当以为这就是彼得讲道的全部,而当看这些是他所强调的题目,是他论证的要点。

English original

But Peter - This was in accordance with the natural temperament of Peter. He was bold, forward, ardent; and he rose now to defend the apostles of Jesus Christ, and Christ himself, from an injurious charge. Not daunted by ridicule or opposition, he felt that now was the time for preaching the gospel to the crowd that had been assembled by curiosity. No ridicule should deter Christians from an honest avowal of their opinions, and a defense of the operations of the Holy Spirit.

With the eleven - Matthias was now one of the apostles, and now appeared as one of the witnesses for the truth. They probably all arose, and took part in the discourse. Possibly Peter began to discourse, and either all spoke together in different languages, or one succeeded another.

Ye men of Judea - People who are Jews; that is, Jews by birth. The original does not mean that they were permanent dwellers in Judea, but that they were Jews, of Jewish families. Literally, "men, Jews."

And all ye that dwell ... - All others besides native-born Jews, whether proselytes or strangers, who were abiding at Jerusalem. This comprised, of course, the whole assembly, and was a respectful and conciliatory introduction to his discourse. Though they had mocked them, yet he treated them with respect, and did not render railing for railing 1 Peter 3:9, but sought to convince them of their error.

Be this known ... - Peter did not intimate that this was a doubtful matter, or one that could not be explained. His address was respectful, yet firm. He proceeded calmly to show them their error. When the enemies of religion deride us or the gospel, we should answer them kindly and respectfully, yet firmly. We should reason with them coolly, and convince them of their error, Proverbs 15:1. In this case Peter acted on the principle which he afterward enjoined on all, 1 Peter 3:15, "Be ready always to give an answer to every man that asketh you a reason of the hope that is in you, with meekness and fear." The design of Peter was to vindicate the conduct of the apostles from the reproach of intoxication; to show that this could be no other than the work of God; and to make an application of the truth to his hearers. This he did:

(1) By showing that this could not be reasonably supposed to be the effect of new wine, Acts 2:15.

(2) by showing that what had occurred had been expressly predicted in the writings of the Jewish prophets, Acts 2:16-21.

(3) by a calm argument, proving the resurrection and ascension of Christ, and showing that this also was in accordance with the Jewish Scriptures, Acts 2:22-35. We are not to suppose that this was the whole of Peter's discourse, but that these were the topics on which he insisted, and the main points of his argument.

15

Acts 2:15

Open passage

简体中文

你们想这些人是醉了……——“这些人”一词在这里包括彼得自己,也包括其余的人;那指控无疑临到他们所有人。

时候刚到巳初——犹太人把日出至日落分为十二等分,因此夏季的钟点比冬季长。第三时相当于我们今天的上午九点。他们不可能在那时醉酒,理由如下:

(1) 那是早祭和晨祷的时辰。在通常用于公共敬拜的时辰醉酒,是极不可能的。

(2) 连醉汉也不常在白昼醉酒,1 Thessalonians 5:7,“醉了的人是在夜间醉”。

(3) 那指控说他们是醉于酒。烈酒,就是我们时代的祸患——酒精——当时并不为人所知。犹太地常用的淡酒,要在这样早的时辰喝到足以致醉的量,是极不可能的。

(4) 犹太人的惯例是,白日第三时之前不吃不喝,尤其在安息日和一切节期;有时这禁食持续到正午。这习俗如此普遍,以致使徒能满有把握地诉诸它,作为对这时辰醉酒之指控的完全反驳。连无节制的人也不惯于在那时辰之前饮酒。Lightfoot 从犹太作者引来的关于这题目的见证如下:“古时敬虔人的习俗是:各人在会堂里献上附有附加祷文的晨祷,然后回家进食”(迈蒙尼德《论安息日》第30章)。“他们留在会堂里直到六时半,然后各人在回家之前献 Minchah 的祷告,然后才吃。”“第四时是用餐之时,人人都吃。”有一位犹太作者说,盗贼与诚实人的分别可由此知道:前者在早晨第四时被人看见又吃又睡,手中拿着杯。但对于像使徒那样以宗教自许的人,这样的事全然不可信。

English original

For these are not drunken ... - The word these here includes Peter himself, as well as the others. The charge doubtless extended to all.

The third hour of the day - The Jews divided their day into twelve equal parts, reckoning from sunrise to sunset. Of course the hours were longer in summer than in winter. The third hour would correspond to our nine o'clock in the morning. The reasons why it was so improbable that they would be drunk at that time were the following:

(1) It was the hour of morning worship, or sacrifice. It was highly improbable that, at an hour usually devoted to public worship, they would be intoxicated.

(2) it was not usual for even drunkards to become drunk in the daytime, 1 Thessalonians 5:7, "They that be drunken are drunken in the night."

(3) the charge was, that they had become drunk with wine. Ardent spirits, or alcohol, that curse of our times, was unknown. It was very improbable that so much of the weak wine commonly used in Judea should have been taken at that early hour as to produce intoxication.

(4) it was a regular practice with the Jews not to eat or drink anything until after the third hour of the day, especially on the Sabbath, and on all festival occasions. Sometimes this abstinence was maintained until noon. So universal was this custom, that the apostle could appeal to it with confidence, as a full refutation of the charge of drunkenness at that hour. Even the intemperate were not accustomed to drink before that hour. The following testimonies on this subject from Jewish writers are from Lightfoot: "This was the custom of pious people in ancient times, that each one should offer his morning prayers with additions in the synagogue, and then return home and take refreshment" (Maimonides, Shabb., chapter 30). "They remained in the synagogue until the sixth hour and a half, and then each one offered the prayer of the Minchah before he returned home, and then he ate." "The fourth is the hour of repast, when all eat." One of the Jewish writers says that the difference between thieves and honest men might be known by the fact that the former might be seen in the morning at the fourth hour eating and sleeping, and holding a cup in his hand. But for those who made pretensions to religion, as the apostles did, such a thing was altogether improbable.

16

Acts 2:16

Open passage

简体中文

这正是——意即这就是那预言的应验,或说这是早已预言的。这是彼得论证的第二部分,要表明这事与他们自己圣经中的预言相符。

先知约珥所说的——Joel 2:28-32。这段引文无论从希伯来文还是七十士译本,都不是逐字引用的;然而其实质得到了保留。

English original

This is that - This is the fulfillment of that, or this was predicted. This was the second part of Peter's argument, to show that this was in accordance with the predictions in their own Scriptures.

By the prophet Joel - Joel 2:28-32. This is not quoted literally, either from the Hebrew or the Septuagint. The substance, however, is preserved.

17

Acts 2:17

Open passage

简体中文

以后 - 即将要发生,或将要出现。

在末后的日子 - 希伯来文、迦勒底文、叙利亚文和阿拉伯文作"这些事以后",或"以后"。不过,"末后的日子"这一说法在旧约中屡次出现:Genesis 49:1,雅各召了他的众子来,为要告诉他们在"末后的日子"必临到他们的事,即将来的世代——希伯来文作"以后的时代";Micah 4:1,"末后的日子"(希伯来文:后来的时代)"耶和华殿的山"云云;Isaiah 2:2,"末后的日子,耶和华殿的山必坚立,超乎诸山"云云。因此,这一说法本义泛指"将来的世代"。然而,弥赛亚的来临在犹太人眼中是将临各时代中最重大的事件——是整个浩瀚未来中伟大、荣耀、登峰造极的一幕,这短语便逐渐被视为专指那日子的说法。它与早先时代的通常称呼形成对照。

它是与族长的时代、列王的时代、众先知的时代等相对而言的说法。末后的日子,即世界的末期,就是弥赛亚的日子。由此并不能看出他们认为世界那时就要终结;这说法也绝无此意。他们的观念恰恰相反。他们期待弥赛亚治下漫长而荣耀的时代;他的国必存到永远、他的政权加增无穷无尽等应许,正把他们引向这期待。新约的作者们无疑把这一说法理解为指着福音的时代说的。因此他们常用它表明所盼望的弥赛亚时代已经来到,而不是暗示世界正接近终结:Hebrews 1:2,"就在这末世藉着他儿子晓谕我们";1 Peter 1:20,"在这末世才为你们显现";2 Peter 3:3; 1 Peter 1:5; 1 John 2:18,"小子们哪,如今是末时了"云云;Jde 1:18。"末日"一语,我们的救主用来指复活和审判的日子,John 6:39-40, John 6:44-45; John 11:24; John 12:48。在这里,这说法的意思只是"在弥赛亚来临之后的那些将来世代"。

我要将我的灵浇灌 - 希伯来文的说法是"我要将我的灵浇灌出来"。"浇灌"一词通常用于水或血,"把它倒出"或"把它流出",Isaiah 57:6;用于眼泪,"倾倒出来",即哭泣等,Psalm 42:4; 1 Samuel 1:15。在新约中,它用于水、酒或血,Matthew 9:17; Revelation 16:1; Acts 22:20,"你殉道者司提反的血流出"。它也表达"丰富而白白地传送"之意,如泉水白白的涌流,Titus 3:5-6,"圣灵的更新,就是他厚厚浇灌在我们身上的"。照样,Job 36:27,"它们(云)按其蒸气降下雨水";Isaiah 44:3,"我要将水浇灌口渴的人";Isaiah 45:8,"愿穹苍降下公义";Malachi 3:10,"我必倾福与你们,甚至无处可容"。它也用于烈怒与忿怒,当神要表明他决不留情、必要显著惩罚之时,Psalm 69:24; Jeremiah 10:25。它也不少用于圣灵,Proverbs 1:23; Isaiah 44:3; Zechariah 12:10。这样使用时,意思是他要丰厚地赐下属灵的影响。正如圣灵使人更新、使人成圣,"浇灌圣灵"就是白白赐下他的感动,使灵魂得更新、成圣。

我的灵 - 这里的"灵"指三一神的第三位,是救主所应许、奉差来完成他的工作并将其施行于人的。圣灵被视为基督徒所经历一切福分的源头或传递者。因此,他更新人心,John 3:5-6。他是基督徒一切合宜情感与原则的源头,或者说,他结出基督徒的诸般恩典,Galatians 5:22-25; Titus 3:5-7。福音的传开与成功归功于他,Isaiah 32:15-16。神迹的恩赐也溯源于他,尤其是早期基督徒所领受的各种恩赐,1 Corinthians 12:4-10。他必将他的灵浇灌下来,这应许的意思是:在弥赛亚的时代,他要大量倾注那些以赐予人为其特殊职分的感动。其中一部分已在五旬节那天赐下——说外国语能力的奇妙恩赐、使徒们的智慧,以及三千人的归信。

凡有血气的 - 这里的"血气"一词指"人"。见 Romans 1:3 的注释。这里的"凡"不是指每一个个人,而是指每一阶层、每一等级的人。它当限于紧接着列举的种种情形。这些感动不限于任何一个阶层,而要赐给各种各样的人——老年人、少年人、仆婢等。参较 1 Timothy 2:1-4。

你们的儿女 - 即你们的子女。看来女性也分享了圣灵奇妙的影响。传福音的腓利有四个说预言的女儿,Acts 21:9。哥林多教会的女性可能也领受了这恩赐,尽管她们被禁止在会中公开运用,1 Corinthians 14:34。无论"说预言"指什么,这职分在犹太人中间并不限于男性:Exodus 15:20,"女先知米利暗手里拿着鼓"云云;Judges 4:4,"有一位女先知名叫底波拉,当时作以色列的士师";2 Kings 22:14。另见 Luke 2:36,"又有女先知,名叫亚拿"云云。

要说预言 - "说预言"一词有许多不同的用法:

(1)指预告或预先说出将来的事,Matthew 11:13; Matthew 15:7。

(2)占卜、猜测、如先知一般宣告,Matthew 26:68,"你是先知,告诉我们打你的是谁。"

(3)在神的感动之下颂赞神,Luke 1:67。这似乎是古代先知学校中相当重要的一部分活动,1 Samuel 10:5; 1 Samuel 19:20; 1 Samuel 30:15。

(4)教导——因为先知职分中不小的一部分就是教导宗教的教义,Matthew 7:22,"我们不是奉你的名传道……吗?"

(5)因此,它总括而言指"在神的感动之下说话",无论是预告将来的事、颂赞神、教导人宗教的本分,还是"在那感动之下说外国语"。在最后这个意义上,新约用这个词指那些奇妙地领受说外国语能力的人,Acts 19:6。这词也用来指"用人听得懂的语言教导或讲论",与说外国语相对,1 Corinthians 14:1-5。在这里,它的意思是指他们要在神的感动之下说话,特别指说外国语的能力。

你们的少年人要见异象 - 从前神的旨意以多种方式传达给先知。其中之一就是异象,因此先知最通用的名称之一是"先见"。"先见"之名最先加给这一类人,后来才被"先知"之名取代,1 Samuel 9:9,"现在称为先知的,从前称为先见";1 Samuel 9:11, 1 Samuel 9:18-19; 2 Samuel 24:11; 1 Chronicles 29:29 等。这名称来自神旨意传达的方式:看来是使先知进入狂恍状态,然后使异象,即事物或事件的景象,从他的心意之前经过。先知观看这一幕幕经过的景象——那往往华美如真实的洋景——并按其心中所见记录下来。因此,他所记录的,与其说是这些事发生的时间,不如说是意象的接连顺序。这些异象有时在睡梦中出现,有时在先知性的狂恍状态中出现,Daniel 2:28; Daniel 7:1-2, Daniel 7:15; Daniel 8:2; Ezekiel 11:24; Genesis 15:1; Numbers 12:6; Job 4:13; Job 7:14; Ezekiel 1:1; Ezekiel 8:3。

先知往往似乎被迁移、被提到别处,远方的地域或时代的景象从他的心意之前经过,Ezekiel 8:3; Ezekiel 40:2; Ezekiel 11:24; Daniel 8:2。在这种情形下,远方的景象或时日从先知面前经过,他就按其所见记录下来。这现象在福音时代之前并未止息:Acts 9:10,"主在异象中对亚拿尼亚说"云云;Acts 9:12,"又看见了一个人,名叫亚拿尼亚,进来"云云;就是说,保罗虽不在亚拿尼亚跟前,却看见了他的形像;他得着了亚拿尼亚进到他这里来的影像;Acts 10:3,哥尼流"在异象中明明看见神的一个使者进去,到他那里"云云。这是从前神显明他旨意的方式之一;犹太人的语言也就用这种方式来表达启示。虽然严格说来,五旬节那天并没有异象,但那一天乃是在弥赛亚的大经纶之下的一幕——在这经纶之下,神要像古时对犹太人那样清楚地显明他的旨意。

老年人要作异梦 - 从前神的旨意也常以这种方式显明;在福音之下也有若干这样的事例记录在案。神在梦中告诉亚比米勒,撒拉是亚伯拉罕的妻子,Genesis 20:3。他在梦中对雅各说话,Genesis 31:11;对拉班,Genesis 31:24;对约瑟,Genesis 37:5;对酒政和膳长,Genesis 40:5;对法老,Genesis 41:1-7;对所罗门,1 Kings 3:5;对但以理,Daniel 2:3; Daniel 7:1。摩西曾预言,神要以这种方式显明他的旨意,Numbers 12:6。这在福音时代也发生了。约瑟在梦中被警戒,Matthew 1:20; Matthew 2:12-13, Matthew 2:19, Matthew 2:22。彼拉多的妻子也因犹太人对基督的行径,在梦中为此烦恼,Matthew 27:19。这既是从前神向人显明旨意的一种方式,这里的说法就只是表明:他的旨意将被显明;神向人类启示自己,将成为福音时代的一个特征。古人大概有某种方法,可以判断他们的梦是否出于神的传达,还是像如今这样,只是心思在不受意志约束和管束之时的散漫游荡。现今,我们对梦不可存任何信心。参较以赛亚书引论第7、12节。

English original

It shall come to pass - It shall happen, or shall occur.

In the last days - Hebrew, Chaldee, Syriac, and Arabic, after these things, or afterward. The expression the last days, however, occurs frequently in the Old Testament: Genesis 49:1, Jacob called his sons, that he might tell them what should happen to them in the last days, that is, in future times - Heb. in after times; Micah 4:1, "In the last days (Hebrew: in later times) the mountain of the Lord's house," etc.; Isaiah 2:2, "in the last days the mountain of the Lord's house shall be established in the tops of the mountains," etc. The expression then properly denoted "the future times" in general. But, as the coming of the Messiah was to the eye of a Jew the most important event in the coming ages - the great, glorious, and crowning scene in all the vast futurity, the phrase came to be regarded as properly expressive of that. It stood in opposition to the usual denomination of earlier times.

It was a phrase in contrast with the days of the patriarchs, the kings, the prophets, etc. The last days, or the closing period of the world, were the days of the Messiah. It does not appear from this, and it certainly is not implied in the expression, that they supposed the world would then come to an end. Their views were just the contrary. They anticipated a long and glorious time under the dominion of the Messiah, and to this expectation they were led by the promise that his kingdom should be forever; that of the increase of his government there should be no end, etc. This expression was understood by the writers of the New Testament as referring undoubtedly to the times of the gospel. And hence they often used it as denoting that the time of the expected Messiah had come, but not to imply that the world was drawing near to an end: Hebrews 1:2, "God hath spoken in these last days by his Son"; 1 Peter 1:20, "Was manifested in these last times for you"; 2 Peter 3:3; 1 Peter 1:5; 1 John 2:18, "Little children, it is the last time," etc.; Jde 1:18. The expression the last day is applied by our Saviour to the resurrection and the day of judgment, John 6:39-40, John 6:44-45; John 11:24; John 12:48. Here the expression means simply "in those future times, when the Messiah shall have come."

I will pour out of my Spirit - The expression in Hebrew is, "I will pour out my Spirit." The word "pour" is commonly applied to water or to blood, "to pour it out," or "to shed it," Isaiah 57:6; to tears, "to pour them out," that is," to weep, etc., Psalm 42:4; 1 Samuel 1:15. It is applied to water, to wine, or to blood, in the New Testament, Matthew 9:17; Revelation 16:1; Acts 22:20, "The blood of thy martyr Stephen was shed." It conveys also the idea of "communicating largely or freely," as water is poured freely from a fountain, Titus 3:5-6, "The renewing of the Holy Spirit, which he shed on us abundantly." Thus, Job 36:27, "They (the clouds) pour down rain according to the vapor thereof"; Isaiah 44:3, "I will pour water on him that is thirsty"; Isaiah 45:8, "Let the skies pour down righteousness"; Malachi 3:10, "I will pour you out a blessing." It is also applied to fury and anger, when God intends to say that he will not spare, but will signally punish, Psalm 69:24; Jeremiah 10:25. It is not infrequently applied to the Spirit, Proverbs 1:23; Isaiah 44:3; Zechariah 12:10. As thus used it means that he will bestow large measures of spiritual influences. As the Spirit renews and sanctifies people, so to pour out the Spirit is to grant freely his influences to renew and sanctify the soul.

My Spirit - The Spirit here denotes the Third Person of the Trinity, promised by the Saviour, and sent to finish his work, and apply it to people. The Holy Spirit is regarded as the source or conveyer of all the blessings which Christians experience. Hence, he renews the heart, John 3:5-6. He is the source of all proper feelings and principles in Christians, or he produces the Christian graces, Galatians 5:22-25; Titus 3:5-7. The spread and success of the gospel is attributed to him, Isaiah 32:15-16. Miraculous gifts are traced to him, especially the various gifts with which the early Christians were endowed, 1 Corinthians 12:4-10. The promise that he would pour out his Spirit means that he would, in the time of the Messiah, impart a large measure of those influences which it was his special province to communicate to people. A part of them were communicated on the day of Pentecost, in the miraculous endowment of the power of speaking foreign languages, in the wisdom of the apostles, and in the conversion of the three thousand,

Upon all flesh - The word "flesh" here means "persons," or "people." See the notes on Romans 1:3. The word "all" here does not mean every individual, but every class or rank of individuals. It is to be limited to the cases specified immediately. The influences were not to be confined to any one class, but were to be communicated to all kinds of persons - old men, youth, servants, etc. Compare 1 Timothy 2:1-4.

And your sons and your daughters - Your children. It would seem that females shared in the remarkable influences of the Holy Spirit. Philip the Evangelist had four daughters which did prophesy, Acts 21:9. It is probable also that the females of the church of Corinth partook of this gift, though they were forbidden to exercise it in public, 1 Corinthians 14:34. The office of prophesying, whatever was meant by that, was not confined to the people among the Jews: Exodus 15:20, "Miriam, the prophetess, took a timbrel," etc.; Judges 4:4, "Deborah, a prophetess, judged Israel"; 2 Kings 22:14. See also Luke 2:36, "There was one Anna, a prophetess," etc.

Shall prophesy - The word "prophesy" is used in a great variety of senses:

(1) It means to predict or foretell future events, Matthew 11:13; Matthew 15:7.

(2) to divine, to conjecture, to declare as a prophet might, Matthew 26:68, "Prophesy who smote thee."

(3) to celebrate the praises of God, being under a divine influence, Luke 1:67. This seems to have been a considerable part of the employment in the ancient schools of the prophet, 1 Samuel 10:5; 1 Samuel 19:20; 1 Samuel 30:15.

(4) to teach - as no small part of the office of the prophets was to teach the doctrines of religion, Matthew 7:22, "Have we not prophesied in thy name?"

(5) it denotes, then, in general, "to speak under a divine influence," whether in foretelling future events, in celebrating the praises of God, in instructing others in the duties of religion, or "in speaking foreign languages under that influence." In this last sense the word is used in the New Testament, to denote those who were miraculously endowed with the power of speaking foreign languages, Acts 19:6. The word is also used to denote "teaching, or speaking in intelligible language, in opposition to speaking a foreign tongue," 1 Corinthians 14:1-5. In this place it means that they would speak under a divine influence, and is specially applied to the power of speaking in a foreign tongue.

Your young men shall see visions - The will of God in former times was communicated to the prophets in various ways. One was by visions, and hence one of the most usual names of the prophets was seers. The name seer was first given to that class of men, and was superseded by the name prophet, 1 Samuel 9:9, "He that is now called a prophet was beforetime called a seer"; 1 Samuel 9:11, 1 Samuel 9:18-19; 2 Samuel 24:11; 1 Chronicles 29:29, etc. This name was given from the manner in which the divine will was communicated, which seems to have been by throwing the prophet into an ecstasy, and then by causing the vision, or the appearance of the objects or events to pass before the mind. The prophet looked upon the passing scene, the often splendid diorama as it actually occurred, and recorded it as it appeared to his mind. Hence, he recorded rather the succession of images than the times in which they would occur. These visions occurred sometimes when they were asleep, and sometimes during a prophetic ecstasy, Daniel 2:28; Daniel 7:1-2, Daniel 7:15; Daniel 8:2; Ezekiel 11:24; Genesis 15:1; Numbers 12:6; Job 4:13; Job 7:14; Ezekiel 1:1; Ezekiel 8:3.

Often the prophet seemed to be transferred or transported to another place from where he was, and the scene in a distant land or age passed before the mind, Ezekiel 8:3; Ezekiel 40:2; Ezekiel 11:24; Daniel 8:2. In this case the distant scene or time passed before the prophet, and he recorded it as it appeared to him. That this did not cease before the times of the gospel is evident: Acts 9:10, "To Ananias said the Lord in a vision," etc.; Acts 9:12, "and hath seen in a vision a man named Ananias," etc.; that is, Paul hath seen Ananias represented to him, though absent; he has had an image of him coming in to him; Acts 10:3, Cornelius "saw in a vision evidently an angel of God coming to him," etc. This was one of the modes by which in former times God made known his will; and the language of the Jews came to express a revelation in this manner. Though there were strictly no visions on the day of Pentecost, yet that was one scene under the great economy of the Messiah under which God would make known his will in a manner as clear as he did to the ancient Jews.

Your old men shall dream dreams - The will of God in former times was made known often in this manner; and there are several instances recorded in which it was done under the gospel. God informed Abimelech in a dream that Sarah was the wife of Abraham, Genesis 20:3. He spoke to Jacob in a dream, Genesis 31:11; to Laban, Genesis 31:24; to Joseph, Genesis 37:5; to the butler and baker, Genesis 40:5; to Pharaoh, Genesis 41:1-7; to Solomon, 1 Kings 3:5; to Daniel, Daniel 2:3; Daniel 7:1. It was prophesied by Moses that in this way God would make known his will, Numbers 12:6. It occurred even in the times of the gospel. Joseph was warned in a dream, Matthew 1:20; Matthew 2:12-13, Matthew 2:19, Matthew 2:22. Pilate's wife was also troubled in this manner about the conduct of the Jews to Christ, Matthew 27:19. As this was one way in which the will of God was made known formerly to people, so the expression here denotes simply that His will would be made known; that it would be one characteristic of the times of the gospel that God would reveal Himself to mankind. The ancients probably had some mode of determining whether their dreams were divine communications, or whether they were, as they are now, the mere erratic wanderings of the mind when unrestrained and unchecked by the will. At present no confidence is to be put in dreams. Compare the introduction to Isaiah, section 7, 12.

18

Acts 2:18

Open passage

简体中文

我的仆人 - 约珥书的希伯来原文作“仆人”;但七十士译本和拉丁文武加大译本则译作“我的仆人”。在约珥书中,先知似乎是在列举社会中各种不同的身份和阶层:圣灵的影响不限于任何一个阶层;它必临到老年和少年,甚至临到仆人和使女。迦勒底意译本(Chaldee Paraphrase)也是这样理解的。但七十士译本和彼得显然是把它理解为神的仆人,因为圣经中敬拜神的人常被称为仆人。见 Romans 1:1。然而,约珥所要指的也可能就是神的仆人;因为经文并不像前文“你们的儿子”等处那样作“你们的仆人”,而是换了形式,作“仆人和使女”。因此,这句话可以采纳七十士译本和彼得的理解;无疑,正是希伯来原文中的这一变化,使彼得提到“我的仆人”,而不是“你们的仆人”。

我的使女 - 指女性的仆人。这名称也多次用来称呼敬虔的妇人(Psalm 86:16;Psalm 116:16;Luke 1:38、Luke 1:48)。本节的意思与前一节并无实质差别:在福音时代,凡受福音感化的人,都必显著地蒙赐能力,得以宣告神的旨意。

English original

And on my servants - The Hebrew text in Joel is "upon the servants." The Septuagint and the Latin Vulgate, however, render it "on my servants." In Joel, the prophet would seem to be enumerating the different conditions and ranks of society. The influences of the Spirit would be confined to no class; they would descend on old and young, and even on servants and handmaids. So the Chaldee Paraphrase understood it. But the Septuagint and Peter evidently understood it in the sense of servants of God, as the worshippers of God are often called servants in the Scriptures. See Romans 1:1. It is possible, however, that Joel intended to refer to the servants of God. It is not "upon your servants," etc., as in the former expression, "your sons," etc.; but the form is changed, "upon servants and handmaids." The language, therefore, will admit the construction of the Septuagint and of Peter; and it was this variation in the original Hebrew which suggested, doubtless, the mention of "my servants," etc., instead of your servants.

And on my handmaids - Female servants. The name is several times given to pious women, Psalm 86:16; Psalm 116:16; Luke 1:38, Luke 1:48. The meaning of this verse does not materially differ from the former. In the times of the gospel, those who were brought under its influence would be remarkably endowed with ability to declare the will of God.

19

Acts 2:19

Open passage

简体中文

我要显出奇事 - 直译是“我要赐下兆头”——δώσω τέρατα dōsō terata。希伯来文的 מופתים mowpatiym,本义是“奇事;惊人的事件;神或他的使者所行的神迹”(Exodus 4:21;Exodus 7:3、Exodus 7:9;Exodus 11:9;Deuteronomy 4:34 等)。这是旧约中指神迹的常用字。但在这里,它指一种兆头性的景象、一件奇事、一个非凡的事件。在新约中,它常与“神迹”一词连用——“神迹和奇事”(Matthew 24:24;Mark 13:22;John 4:48)。在这些地方,它不一定指神迹,而是指异常而引人注目的景象。在这里,它用以指天空、太阳、月亮等所发生的巨大而显著的变化。希伯来原文作:“我要在天上、在地上显出兆头。”彼得是按意义引用,而不是按字面引用。七十士译本在此处是希伯来文的直译;这是新约作者既非取自希伯来原文、也非取自七十士译本引用的实例之一。

解释这几节的困难,大部分在于给“主大而显明的日子”这一说法赋予恰当的含义。若把它限于五旬节那日,那么当时显然并没有发生这类事件。但我们相信,把它限于那个时间并无道理。这里的描述属于“末后的日子”(Acts 2:17),即众先知所知的“末时”的那整段时期,无论那时期有多长。那段时期可以延续许多世纪;而在这段时期之内,这一切事件都要发生。主的日子,就是神以特殊方式彰显自己的日子;是他如此显著地在奇事和审判中显现、以致那日可称为“他的日子”的日子。因此,这词被用于审判之日,就是人子的日子;在那日,他要成为万众瞩目的对象,并要大得荣耀(Luke 17:24;1 Thessalonians 5:2;Philippians 1:6;2 Peter 3:12)。如果如我所料,这里的“主大而显明的日子”是指神在审判中彰显自己的将来之时,那么我们就不可以为彼得的意思是说,这些“奇事”会发生在五旬节那天,或当时就已经应验;而是说它们将发生在称为“末后的日子”(即弥赛亚的日子)的那段不定时期之内,并在那时期被主的大日终结之前发生。方言的恩赐,乃是关乎那些日子之普遍预言的部分应验。这预言既已部分应验,便是它必完全应验的凭据;这样,就为人必须悔改、必须求告主名以致得救立下了根基。

有血 - 血常被用作杀戮或战争的表号。

有火 - 火也是战争的形像,或战时城邑和住处被焚的景象。

有烟雾 - 译作“烟雾”的字 ἀτμίς atmis,通常指从地面等升起、易于四处飘动的雾气。在这里,它(希伯来文:约珥书)指升腾的烟柱,是战争灾祸的另一幅图景——从焚烧的城邑升起的烟。战争中向来有烧毁敌方城邑、尽力使其无力抵抗的惯例。因此,这里所指示的灾祸,就是这类景象所代表的灾祸。这里究竟指哪些具体的事件,如今已无法断言。不过可以说,这类景象在耶路撒冷被毁之前确曾发生;而且约珥的描述与救主预言耶路撒冷毁灭时的描述之间,有显著的相似之处。见 Matthew 24:21-24 注释。汤姆森博士(Dr. Thomson,《圣地与圣书》卷二,第311页)认为,约珥所指的,可能是叙利亚热风(sirocco)常有的景象,或这些景象提示了这里所用的比喻。他说:“我们有两种叙利亚热风:一种伴有狂风,使空气中充满尘土和细沙。我常见整个天空被这种沙云笼罩,日头在其中失去光芒,看起来像一团闷燃的暗火球。约珥那强烈的预言性比喻——彼得在五旬节那日所引用的:‘在天上、在地下,我要显出奇事;有血,有火,有烟雾;日头要变为黑暗,月亮要变为血’——所提示的,可能正是这一现象。那‘烟雾的柱子’,大概就是叙利亚热风常伴有的局部旋风把沙尘高高卷入空中所形成的沙柱。在浩兰大沙漠上,我见过二十来根这样的沙柱迅速掠过平原,它们与‘烟雾的柱子’极为相似。”

English original

I will show wonders - Literally, "I will give signs" - δώσω τέρατα dōsō terata. The word in the Hebrew, מופתים mowpatiym, means properly "prodigies; wonderful occurrences; miracles performed by God or his messengers," Exodus 4:21; Exodus 7:3, Exodus 7:9; Exodus 11:9; Deuteronomy 4:34, etc. It is the common word to denote a miracle in the Old Testament. Here it means, however, a portentous appearance, a prodigy, a remarkable occurrence. It is commonly joined in the New Testament with the word "signs" - "signs and wonders," Matthew 24:24; Mark 13:22; John 4:48. In these places it does not of necessity mean miracles, but unusual and remarkable appearances. Here it is used to mean great and striking changes in the sky, the sun, moon, etc. The Hebrew is, "I will give signs in the heaven and upon the earth." Peter has quoted it according to the sense, and not according to the letter. The Septuagint is here a literal translation of the Hebrew; and this is one of the instances where the New Testament writers did not quote from either.

Much of the difficulty of interpreting these verses consists in affixing the proper meaning to the expression "that great and notable day of the Lord." If it be limited to the day of Pentecost, it is certain that no such events occurred at that time. But there is, it is believed, no propriety in confining it to that time. The description here pertains to "the last days" Acts 2:17; that is, to the whole of that period of duration, however long, which was known by the prophets as "the last times." That period might be extended through many centuries; and during that period all these events would take place. The day of the Lord is the day when God will manifest himself in a special manner; a day when he will so strikingly be seen in his wonders and his judgments that it may be called his day. Thus, it is applied to the day of judgment as the day of the Son of man; the day in which he will be the great attractive object, and will be signally glorified, Luke 17:24; 1 Thessalonians 5:2; Philippians 1:6; 2 Peter 3:12. If, as I suppose, "that notable day of the Lord" here refers to that future time when God will manifest himself in judgment, then we are not to suppose that Peter meant to say that these "wonders" would take place on the day of Pentecost, or had their fulfillment then, "but would occur under that indefinite period called "the last days," the days of the Messiah, and before that period Was closed by the great day of the Lord." The gift of tongues was a partial fulfillment of the general prophecy pertaining to those times. And as the prophecy was thus partially fulfilled, it was a pledge that it would be entirely; and thus there was laid a foundation for the necessity of repentance, and for calling on the Lord in order to be saved.

Blood - Blood is commonly used as an emblem of slaughter or of battle.

Fire - Fire is also an image of war, or the conflagration of towns and dwellings in time of war.

Vapour of smoke - The word "vapor," ἀτμίς atmis, means commonly an exhalation from the earth, etc., easily moved from one place to another. Here it means (Hebrew: Joel) rising columbus or pillars of smoke, and is another image of the calamities of war the smoke rising from burning towns. It has always been customary in war to burn the towns of an enemy, and to render him as helpless as possible. Hence, the calamities denoted here are those represented by such scenes. To what particular scenes there is reference here it is impossible now to say. It may be remarked, however, that scenes of this kind occurred before the destruction of Jerusalem, and there is a striking resemblance between the description in Joel and that by which our Saviour foretells the destruction of Jerusalem. See the notes on Matthew 24:21-24. Dr. Thomson (Land and the Book, vol. 2, p. 311) supposes that the reference in Joel may have been to the usual appearances of the sirocco, or that they may have suggested the image used here. He says: "We have two kinds of sirocco, one accompanied with vehement wind, which fills the air with dust and fine sand. I have often seen the whole heavens veiled in gloom with this sort of sandcloud, through which the sun, shorn of his beams, looked like a globe of dull smouldering fire. It may have been this phenomenon which suggested that strong prophetic figure of Joel, quoted by Peter on the day of Pentecost. Wonders in the heaven and in the earth; blood, and fire, and pillars of smoke; the sun shall be turned into darkness, and the moon into blood. The pillars of smoke are probably those columns of sand and dust raised high in the air by local whirlwinds, which often accompany the sirocco. On the great desert of the Hauran I have seen a score of them marching with great rapidity over the plain, and they closely resemble 'pillars of smoke.'"

20

Acts 2:20

Open passage

简体中文

日头要变为黑暗 - 见 Matthew 24:29 注释。这里用于日头的同一类意象,在那处也照样使用;这类表述并不少见(Mark 13:24;2 Peter 3:7-10)。日头发光是昌盛的表号;日头隐没、亏蚀或落下,是灾祸的表号,圣经中常这样使用(Isaiah 60:20;Jeremiah 15:9;Ezekiel 32:7;Amos 8:9;Revelation 6:12;Revelation 8:12;Revelation 9:2;Revelation 16:8)。说日头变暗、变为黑暗,是灾祸的意象,尤指兵燹之祸——焚烧城邑的烟升上天空,遮蔽了日光。因此,这话不可按字面理解,也不提供任何关于世界末了太阳将会如何的征兆。

月亮要变为血 - 这里“血”指大气中充满烟尘水气时月亮所呈的暗淡血色,尤其指地震和火山喷发使烟与火焰冲天时,月亮所呈现的阴森可怖的景象(Revelation 6:12:“羔羊揭开第六印的时候,我又看见地大震动,日头变黑像毛布,满月变红像血”;Revelation 8:8)。在这里,这表示大灾大难。所用的意象指向战争、大火和地震。这些事在 Matthew 24 中被应用于耶路撒冷的毁灭;又因它们确实在那事件之前发生(见 Matthew 24 注释),可以推想约珥的预言所指的直接就是那事。因此,彼得在此引用的意思是:五旬节那日所发生的,是弥赛亚时代将出现的一系列奇事的开始。经文并没有暗示这些景象要在那个时代结束或穷尽;它们可能发生在那尚待临到全地的主大日之前。

主大而显明的日子 - 这之所以称为主的“大”日,因为在那日,他要以比其他时候更震撼、更显著的方式彰显自己。“显明”一词(ἐπιφανῆ epiphanē),意思是“非凡的、辉煌的、卓越的”。在约珥书中,这词是“可怕可畏”,适用于灾殃、试炼和审判之日。这里译作“显明”的希腊字,在七十士译本中也常用来指“灾祸”或“审判之时”(Deuteronomy 10:21;2 Samuel 7:23)。这适用于神显著彰显自己的任何日子,特别是他出来刑罚世人之日,如耶路撒冷被毁之时,或审判之日。这里的意思是:这些奇事将发生在神出来施行审判的那个大日临到之先。

English original

The sun shall be turned into darkness - See the notes on Matthew 24:29. The same images used here with reference to the sun and moon are used also there: They occur not infrequently, Mark 13:24; 2 Peter 3:7-10. The shining of the sun is an emblem of prosperity; the withdrawing, the eclipse, or the setting of the sun is an emblem of calamity, and is often thus need in the Scriptures, Isaiah 60:20; Jeremiah 15:9; Ezekiel 32:7; Amos 8:9; Revelation 6:12; Revelation 8:12; Revelation 9:2; Revelation 16:8. To say that the sun is darkened, or turned into darkness, is an image of calamity, and especially of the calamities of war, when the smoke of burning cities rises to heaven and obscures his light. This is not, therefore, to be taken literally, nor does it afford any indication of what will be at the end of the world in regard to the sun.

The moon into blood - The word "blood" here means that obscure, sanguinary color which the moon has when the atmosphere is filled with smoke and vapor, and especially the lurid and alarming appearance which it assumes when smoke and flames are thrown up by earthquakes and fiery eruptions, Revelation 6:12, "And I beheld when he had opened the sixth seal, and lo, there was a great earthquake, and the sun became black as sackcloth of hair, and the moon became as blood," Revelation 8:8. In this place it denotes great calamities. The figures used are indicative of wars, and conflagrations, and earthquakes. As these things are Matthew 24 applied to the destruction of Jerusalem; as they actually occurred previous to that event (see the notes on Matthew 24), it may be supposed that the prophecy in Joel had an immediate reference to that. The meaning of the quotation by Peter in this place therefore is, that what occurred on the day of Pentecost was the beginning of the serges of wonders that was to take place during the times of the Messiah. It is not intimated that those scenes were to close or to be exhausted in that age. They may precede that great day of the Lord which is yet to come in view of the whole earth.

That great and notable day of the Lord - This is called the great day of the Lord, because on that day he will be signally manifested, more impressively and strikingly than on other times. The word "notable," ἐπιφανῆ epiphanē, means "signal, illustrious, distinguished." In Joel the word is "terrible or fearful"; a word applicable to days of calamity, and trial, and judgment. The Greek word here rendered notable is also in the Septuagint frequently used to denote "calamity" or "times of judgment," Deuteronomy 10:21; 2 Samuel 7:23. This will apply to any day in which God signally manifests himself, but particularly to a day when he shall come forth to punish people, as at the destruction of Jerusalem, or at the day of judgment. The meaning is, that those wonders would take place before that distinguished day should arrive when God would come forth in judgment.

21

Acts 2:21

Open passage

简体中文

凡求告主名的 - 在这些奇事和危险之中,凡求告主名的就必得救(约珥)。主的名与主自己所指相同。这是希伯来语的表达方式,意指求告主,Psalm 79:6;Zechariah 13:9。

就必得救 - 希伯来文的意思是必蒙搭救,即从将要临到的灾祸中得蒙搭救。当灾祸威胁、神出来审判他们的时候,那些以呼求主为特征的人必蒙搭救。这在任何时候都同样真实。值得注意的是,耶路撒冷被围时没有一个基督徒丧命。虽然有一百多万犹太人死亡,但那里的基督门徒因预先得了他的警告,在看见罗马人逼近的兆头时,便退往埃利亚(Aelia),得以保全。审判的日子也将如此。凡素来以“呼求神”为特征的人,那时都必得救。恶人那时要向山岩呼求,求它们把他们藏起来躲避主;而那些曾呼求他恩惠怜悯的人,必寻得搭救。彼得对这段经文的用法是这样的:灾祸将要来临;审判的日子临近;他们正经过世界历史的末后日子,因此他们当求告主名,从悬在罪人头上的危险中得蒙拯救。彼得有意把这应用到弥赛亚身上,并以主的名指主耶稣,这几乎没有疑问。见 1 Corinthians 1:2。保罗也以同样的方式使用这段经文,明确地把它应用到主耶稣基督身上,Romans 10:13-14。在约珥书中,译作“主”的词是 יהוה Yahweh,神那不可传授、独一无二的名;新约对眼前这段经文的使用,显明使徒们怎样看主耶稣基督,并证明他们毫不迟疑地把惟独属于神的名号和属性归于他。

本节教导我们:

  1. 面对将要临到的神的审判,我们应当预备。我们必将被召经过这世界的末了场景,经过日头变为黑暗、月亮变为血、主的大日来到的时候。

  2. 得救是容易的。神向我们所要的,只是呼求他、向他祷告,他必应允并施拯救。人若连呼求神、向他求救这么容易的事都不肯作,他们被丢弃显然是正当的。救恩的条件不能比这更清楚、更容易了。这应许是宽宏的、白白的、普世的,除了罪人心中的拦阻之外,再无别的障碍。

从彼得为五旬节场景所作辩护的这一部分,我们还可以学到:

  1. 宗教复兴当被视为基督教会历史的一部分而加以期待。他论到神浇灌他的灵等事,说这是要在末后的日子发生,即在弥赛亚治理之下将要来临的那段不定而漫长的时期中发生。他的话绝非限于五旬节当日;它们对将来的时期与对那时同样适用;我们当期待圣灵降临以唤醒人、使人归信,视之为基督教历史的一部分。

  2. 这也足以使复兴免受历来对它的一切指控。现代人对复兴所提出的一切反对——不合常规、过火、野火般的狂热、狂信、混乱等等——本可以同样恰当地加在五旬节的场景上。然而一位使徒表明,那场景正与旧约的预言相符,是毫无疑问的圣灵之工。那工作若可辩护,现代的复兴也可辩护。那工作若在这些方面实在无可指摘,现代的恩典之工就不当因同样的事遭受反对。那工作若曾使使徒们深感关切、使他们觉得必须为它洗刷所受的指控,那么今日的基督徒和基督的执事们也当有同样的挂虑来护卫复兴,而不可列在辱骂复兴、诽谤复兴或与复兴为敌的人中间。圣灵的工作,无需自称基督徒者之助,也必不乏仇敌;凡在神和他基督的仇敌行列中、反对圣灵在人心里大能之工的人,其心怀和品格都绝无可羡。

English original

Whosoever shall call - In the midst of these wonders and dangers, whosoever should call on the Lord should be delivered (Joel). The name of the Lord is the same as the Lord himself. It is a Hebraism, signifying to call on the Lord, Psalm 79:6; Zechariah 13:9.

Shall be saved - In Hebrew, shall be delivered, that is, from impending calamities. When they threaten, and God is coming forth to judge them, it shall be that those who are characterized as those who call on the Lord shall be delivered. This is equally true at all times. It is remarkable that no Christians perished in the siege of Jerusalem. Though more than a million of Jews perished, yet the followers of Christ who were there, having been warned by him, when they saw the signs of the Romans approaching, withdrew to Aelia, and were preserved. So it shall be in the day of judgment. All whose character it has been that "they called on God" will then be saved. While the wicked will then call on the rocks and the mountains to shelter them from the Lord, those who have invoked his favor and mercy will find deliverance. The use which Peter makes of this passage is this: Calamities were about to come; the day of judgment was approaching; they were passing through the last days of the earth's history, and therefore it became them to call on the name of the Lord, and to obtain deliverance from the dangers which impended over the guilty. There can be little doubt that Peter intended to apply this to the Messiah, and that by the name of the Lord he meant the Lord Jesus. See 1 Corinthians 1:2. Paul makes the same use of the passage, expressly applying it to the Lord Jesus Christ, Romans 10:13-14. In Joel, the word translated "Lord" is יהוה Yahweh, the incommunicable and unique name of God; and the use of the passage before us in the New Testament shows how the apostles regarded the Lord Jesus Christ, and proves that they had no hesitation in applying to him names and attributes which could belong to no one but God.

This verse teaches us:

  1. That in prospect of the judgments of God which are to come, we should make preparation. We shall be called to pass through the closing scenes of this earth; the time when the sun shall be turned into darkness, and the moon into blood, and when the great day of the Lord shall come.

  2. It is easy to be saved. All that God requires of us is to call upon him, to pray to him, and he will answer and save. If people will not do so easy a thing as to call on God, and ask him for salvation, it is obviously proper that they should be cast off. The terms of salvation could not be made plainer or easier. The offer is wide, free, universal, and there is no obstacle but what exists in the heart of the sinner.

And from this part of Peter's vindication of the scene on the day of Pentecost we may learn also:

  1. That revivals of religion are to be expected as a part of the history of the Christian church. He speaks of God's pouring out his Spirit, etc., as what was to take place in the last days, that is, in the indefinite and large tract of time which was to come, under the administration of the Messiah. His remarks are by no means limited to the day of Pentecost. They are as applicable to future periods as to that time; and we are to expect it as a part of Christian history, that the Holy Spirit will be sent down to awaken and convert people.

  2. This will also vindicate revivals from all the changes which have ever been brought against them. All the objections of irregularity, extravagance, wildfire, enthusiasm, disorder, etc., which have been alleged against revivals in modern times, might have been brought with equal propriety against the scene on the day of Pentecost. Yet an apostle showed that that was in accordance with the predictions of the Old Testament, and was an undoubted work of the Holy Spirit. If that work could be vindicated, then modern revivals may be. If that was really liable to no objections on these accounts, then modern works of grace should not be objected to for the same things. And if that excited deep interest in the apostles; if they felt deep concern to vindicate it from the charge brought against it, then Christians and Christian ministers now should feel similar solicitude to defend revivals, and not be found among their revilers, their calumniators, or their foes. There will be enemies enough of the work of the Holy Spirit without the aid of professed Christians, and that man possesses no enviable feelings or character who is found with the enemies of God and his Christ in opposing the mighty work of the Holy Spirit on the human heart.

22

Acts 2:22

Open passage

简体中文

以色列人哪——即以色列或雅各的后裔,也就是犹太人。彼得这时进入他论证的第三部分,要表明耶稣基督已经复活;所发生的这一情景正与他的应许相符,是他复活、被他高举为弥赛亚的证据;因此,他们应当为自己亲手杀死弥赛亚的大罪而悔改。

神所证明的人——即被显明、被证实为蒙神悦纳、由神所差遣的人。

异能、奇事、神迹——这三个词中,第一个本指耶稣所彰显的大能作为;第二个指伴随他的非凡出众的事件,足以激发惊奇或诧异;第三个指表明他从神而来的表征或证据。合起来,它们指一系列出众的作为——叫死人复活、医治病人等——这些都表明耶稣是从神那里差来的。它们之所以能证明他从神而来,理由在于:神绝不会把这样的能力赐给骗子,因此耶稣确如他所宣称的那样。

神借着他所行的——主耶稣自己常常把这些事的能力归源于父所给的差遣,但他这样说时,也显明自己与父密切联合(见John 5:19;John 5:30)。彼得在此说,神借着耶稣基督行了这些作为,为要表明耶稣确是他所差来的,因此他拥有神的印记和见证。耶稣自己也说过同样的话(见John 5:36):"父交给我要我成就的事,就是我所作的事,这便见证我是父所差来的。"神在创造以及救赎中所成就的大工,圣经都说是借着他的儿子作成的(见Hebrews 1:2):"也曾借着他创造诸世界";参看John 1:3;Colossians 1:15-19。

在你们中间——即在你们自己的国土上。而且在场的人中,很可能有许多人曾亲眼见过他的神迹。

正如你们自己知道的——他们或是亲眼见过这些事,或是因四处充盈的证据而知道他确实行过这些事。即使在基督的时代,犹太人也不敢质疑他的神迹(见John 15:24)。他们既承认神迹,就试图把它归于别西卜的影响(见Matthew 9:34;Mark 3:22)。耶稣的神迹如此确凿、如此众多,以致彼得在此诉诸它们,说犹太人自己也知道这些事确实行过,并且满有把握,连他们也无法否认。在此基础上,他进而建立起论证,证明耶稣真是弥赛亚。

English original

Ye men of Israel - Descendants of Israel or Jacob, that is, Jews. Peter proceeds now to the third part of his argument, to show that Jesus Christ had been raised up; that the scene which had occurred was in accordance with his promise, was proof of his resurrection, and of his exaltation to be the Messiah; and that, therefore, they should repent for their great sin in having put their own Messiah to death.

A man approved of God - A man who was shown or demonstrated to have the approbation of God, or to have been sent by him.

By miracles, and wonders, and signs - The first of these words properly means the displays of power which Jesus made; the second, the unusual or remarkable events which attended him, as suited to excite wonder or amazement; the third, the sights or proofs that he was from God. Together, they denote the array or series of remarkable works - raising the dead, healing the sick, etc., which showed that Jesus was sent from God. The proof which they furnished that he was from God was this, that He would not confer such power on an impostor, and that therefore Jesus was what he pretended to be.

Which God did, by him - The Lord Jesus himself often traced his power to do these things to his commission from the Father, but he did it in such a way as to show that he was closely united to him, John 5:19, John 5:30. Peter here says that God did these works by Jesus Christ, to show that Jesus was truly sent by him, and that therefore he had the seal and attestation of God. The same thing Jesus himself said, John 5:36, "The work which the Father hath given me to finish, the same works that I do, bear witness of me, that the Father hath sent me." The great works which God has made in creation, as well as in redemption, he is represented as having done by his Son, Hebrews 1:2, "By whom also he made the worlds," John 1:3; Colossians 1:15-19.

In the midst of you - In your own land. It is also probable that many of the persons present had been witnesses of his miracles.

As ye yourselves also know - They knew it either by having witnessed them, or by the evidence which everywhere abounded of the truth that he had performed them. The Jews, even in the time of Christ, did not dare to call his miracles in question, John 15:24. While they admitted the miracle, they attempted to trace it to the influence of Beelzebub, Matthew 9:34; Mark 3:22. So decided and numerous were the miracles of Jesus, that Peter here appeals to them as having been known by the Jews themselves to have been performed, and with a confidence that even riley could not deny it. On this he proceeds to rear his argument for the truth of his Messiahship.

23

Acts 2:23

Open passage

简体中文

被交与人——ἔκδοτον ekdoton。"被交"一词通常用于那些被交在仇敌或对手手中的人。它表明,耶稣是被那些本应保护他的人交在仇敌手中的。这样,他被交给众祭司长(Mark 10:33);彼拉多释放巴拉巴,将耶稣交给他们随意处置(Mark 15:15; Luke 23:25);他被交给外邦人(Luke 18:32);众祭司长把他解交给彼拉多(Matthew 27:2);彼拉多则把他交去钉十字架(Matthew 27:26; John 19:16)。耶稣的死就是这样成就的:他从一个法庭被交到另一个法庭,从其同胞的一个要求被交到另一个要求,直到他们终于夺去了他的性命。这里也可能暗示,他是被神自己交在人手中的。如此,他被视为神所赐下的(John 3:16; 1 John 4:9-10)。叙利亚文译本将此译作:"这位按神的预知和旨意被定准要如此的一位,你们把他交在恶人手中"等等。阿拉伯文译本则作:"这位藉着恶人的手被交给你们的,你们接待了,并且在戏弄他之后把他杀了。"

按着神的定旨——译作"定旨"的词 τῇ ὡρίσμένῃ tē hōrismenē,原意是"被限定、被标出、被划定界限之物",如标出或划定一块田地的界限等。见 Romans 1:1, Romans 1:4。在 Acts 10:42 中它被译作"神所派定",表明神的旨意就是要如此成就,即要耶稣作审判活人死人的主;Luke 22:22 "人子固然要照所预定的去世",即照神所预先定意或决定的去行;Acts 11:29 "门徒……定意照各人的力量捐钱,送给住在犹太的弟兄",即他们预先决意或定意要这样行;Acts 17:26 "神……预先定准他们的疆界和他们的居所的年限"等。在所有这些经文中,都含有目的、意图或计划之意,即为某个将来的行动或事件标出或固定其界限。这个词表明,耶稣的死在发生之前就已被神定准。这一真理由旧约中的一切预言以及救主自己确立了。神并非被迫交出自己的儿子。对此没有任何人对神拥有要求权。因此,他有权规定这事在何时、以何种方式成就。再者,这事既被预言,就表明它是已被定准或决定的。显然,除非一件事确定会发生,否则无人能预言它。因此,这事件必定以某种方式被预先定准或确定。

定旨——βουλή boulē。这个词的原义是"目的、旨令、旨意"。它表达心智在意愿中的活动,或所形成的意图或设计。在这里它指神的目的或旨意;耶稣被交出,乃是照他的计划或旨令:Acts 4:28 "成就你手和你意旨 ἡ βουλή σου hē boulē sou 所预定必有的事";Ephesians 1:11 "照他旨意所预定的";Hebrews 6:17 "神……显明他的旨意是不更改的"。见 Acts 20:27; 1 Corinthians 4:5; Luke 23:51。因此,这里的词证明,耶稣是照神深思熟虑的目的被交出的;这是照他先前的意图和设计。彼得之所以强调这一点,是为了使犹太人确信,耶稣被交出并非因为软弱,也不是因为他无力拯救自己。这样的看法与相信他是弥赛亚并不相容。因此,重要的是维护耶稣的尊严,并显明他的死与神所确定的计划一致,因而不丝毫妨碍他作为弥赛亚的宣称。我们的救主自己也明确宣告了同样的事(John 19:10-11; John 10:18; Matthew 26:53)。

先见——这个词表示"预先看见尚未发生的事"。它隐含:

  1. 全知;以及

  2. 该事件是确定无疑的。

要预见一件偶然的事,即预见一件可发生可不发生的事将会发生,是自相矛盾的。因此,预知意味着那事件因着某种原因必定发生。然而,圣经既把神描绘为定意或决定将来之事的主,而这些事若非他如此决定就不能被他预见,所以这个词有时被用来表示预先定夺,或与"命定"同义(Romans 8:29; Romans 11:2)。在这段经文中,这个词用来表明,耶稣被交出这件事不仅仅是一个单纯赤裸的旨令。它意味着,神是照着他对成就这事的最佳时间、地点和方式的先见而行的。这不仅仅是意志的结果;这是被"何为最佳"的智慧先见所引导的意志。神的一切旨令都是如此。由此推论,犹太人的行为是被预先知道的。神对于他们如何对待他的儿子,没有一事感到意外;对于人的任何行为,他也不会失望。尽管世人邪恶,他的旨意必立定,他必成就自己所喜悦的一切(Isaiah 46:10)。

你们拿了他——见 Matthew 26:57。意即你们犹太人拿了他。当时在场的,可能有亲身参与捉拿耶稣的人,也有许多曾加入喊叫"钉他十字架"的人(Luke 23:18-21)。无论如何,成就这事的是犹太全民族的作为。这是传道忠实的一个显著例证,正如拿单对大卫说"你就是那人"一样(撒母耳记下 12:7)。曾经胆怯到否认主的彼得,如今不顾他们的愤怒和自己所面临的危险,把这可怕的罪归到他的同胞身上。他不作笼统的指控,而是把罪责直接指向他们,宣告他们就是与这惊人罪行有份的人。传道若不把个人的罪咎归给人,若不无所惧怕地宣告他们的沉沦与危险,就不能成功。

藉着无法之人的手——希腊文作"藉着不法者或恶人的手"。这无疑是指彼拉多和罗马兵丁,因为这事是藉着他们成就的。认为这是本节正确解释的理由如下:

(1) 犹太人自己没有处死刑的权力。

(2) 这里所用的"不法"一词 ἀνόμων anomōn,不适用于犹太人,而适用于罗马人。它的本义是"无法的",或"没有律法的人",常用来指外邦人(Romans 2:12, Romans 2:14; 1 Corinthians 9:21)。

(3) 所施行的刑罚是罗马的刑罚。

(4) 事实是,犹太人虽然定了他死罪,却没有亲手处死他,而是要求罗马人这样行。然而,他们虽然藉罗马人行这事,他们仍是此事的主谋;他们图谋、策划并要求处死他,因此他们的罪并不因此减轻。普通法与常识的准则是:"藉他人之手行某事的人,须为此事负责。"犹太人没有亲手处死他,并非出于他们的任何功劳,只不过因为这权力已被夺去。

钉在十字架上杀了——希腊文作"把他挂在十字架上,你们把他杀了"。彼得在这里把这罪完全归给他们。他们雇用别人去行,罪咎并不因此减少。由此我们可以留意:

  1. 这是可以归给任何民族的最令人惊骇、最可怖的罪之一。它集恶毒、叛乱、仇恨与凶杀于一身。而且这不是普通的凶杀。他们所杀的,是他们自己的弥赛亚,是他们列祖的盼望,是神长久应许的那一位,他降临的盼望曾如此长久地鼓舞并激励这个民族。他们如今亲手沾了他的血,站在那里,被控以杀害和平之君的可怖罪名。

  2. 我们藉他人之手行某事,罪咎并不因此减轻。这往往(若非总是)加深并扩大了罪。

  3. 我们在这里有一个显著而清楚的实例,表明神的旨令并不妨碍人的自由作为。这件事确实是预先定准的。没有比这更清楚的了。这里明明如此断言;众先知也以不变的确定性预言了这事。神为了智慧而恩慈的目的,在自己心中定意或命定他的儿子要在那个时候、以那种方式受死;因为他之死的一切情形,正如他降生和生平的一切情形一样,都曾被预言。然而,在这件事上,犹太人和罗马人从未以为、也从未声称他们的行动是被迫或受辖制的。他们所做的,是他们自己所选择的。倘若在这件事上神的旨令都不与人的自由矛盾,那么在任何事上都不会矛盾。除非能证明神强迫人违背自己的意志行事——这是永远无法证明的——否则在那些旨令与人的自由之间就没有任何矛盾。若被强迫,就不会有自由。但神的旨令并非如此。一个行为本身如何,它就是如何;它可以就其本身加以省察和衡量。一件事被预见、被预知或被定意,并不改变其性质,正如一件事行过之后被记住并不改变其性质一样。我们对自己所行之事的记忆并不摧毁我们的自由。我们对自己行为的"自己的目的"并不摧毁我们的自由;任何其他存在者的目的或设计,除非强迫我们违背自己的意志去行事,也不能侵犯一个自由的道德行为。

  4. 我们在这里有一个证明,即神的旨令并不除去一个行为的道德性质。即使证明某个行为属于神允许它发生的智慧计划的一部分,也不能证明那行为是无辜的。没有比将神的儿子钉十字架更残暴的罪了;然而它却在神的旨令中被定准。人一切有罪的行为也是如此。神允许它们的目的并不摧毁它们的性质,也不使它们成为无辜。它们本身如何,就是如何。神的目的并不改变它们的性质;若实际上惩罚它们是对的,它们就必受罚。若神惩罚它们是对的,那么定意惩罚也就是对的。罪人必须为自己的罪交账,而不是为他造物主的计划交账;在忿怒之日,他也不能以"神已命定将来之事"为借口,躲避自己所当受的。倘若有什么人能这样推诿,那本该是彼得所面对的这些人;然而无论彼得还是他们,都不觉得他们的罪咎因耶稣"按着神的定旨先见被交与人"这一事实而有丝毫减轻。

  5. 倘若这事是预先定准的;倘若神的儿子被杀这一惊人恶行是按神的定旨确定的,那么导致这事的各样事件以及伴随它的种种情形,也都是这旨令的一部分。这一件事不能脱离其他事而被确定。

  6. 倘若那事件是被定准的,那么其他事件也可以在不违背人的自由与责任的前提下被定准。再没有比将神的儿子钉十字架更邪恶的行为了;倘若杀他之人的行为尚且属于神智慧的旨意,那么按同样的原则,我们当认定一切事件都在他的掌管之下,都被一个无限智慧良善的目的所安排。

  7. 倘若犹太人不能以"这事是预先命定的"为借口逃避恶名,那么任何罪人也不能。这是可能出现的最清楚的事例;然而使徒并没有暗示,他们的罪可以因这缘故得到任何推托或减轻。因此,这个事例回应了罪人出于这种借口的一切推诿,并证明这些推诿在审判之日既不能帮助他们,也不能拯救他们。

English original

Him, being delivered - ἔκδοτον ekdoton. This word, delivered, is used commonly of those who are surrendered or delivered into the hands of enemies or adversaries. It means that Jesus was surrendered, or given up to his enemies by those who should have been his protectors. Thus, he was delivered to the chief priests, Mark 10:33. Pilate released Barabbas, and delivered Jesus to their will, Mark 15:15; Luke 23:25. He was delivered unto the Gentiles, Luke 18:32; the chief priests delivered him to Pilate, Matthew 27:2; and Pilate delivered him to be crucified, Matthew 27:26; John 19:16. In this manner was the death of Jesus accomplished, by being surrendered from one tribunal to another, and one demand of his countrymen to another, until they succeeded in procuring his death. It may also be implied here that he was given or surrendered by God Himself to the hands of people. Thus, he is represented to have been given by God, John 3:16; 1 John 4:9-10. The Syriac translates this, "Him, who was destined to this by the foreknowledge and will of God, you delivered into the hands of wicked men," etc. The Arabic, "Him, delivered to you by the hands of the wicked, you received, and after you had mocked him you slew him."

By the determinate counsel - The word translated "determinate" - τῇ ὡρίσμένῃ tē hōrismenē - mean, properly, "what is defined, marked out, or bounded; as, to mark out or define the boundary of a field," etc. See Romans 1:1, Romans 1:4. In Acts 10:42, it is translated "ordained of God"; denoting His purpose that it should be so, that is, that Jesus should be the Judge of quick and dead; Luke 22:22, "The Son of man goeth as it is determined of him," that is, as God has purposed or determined beforehand that he should go; Acts 11:29, "The disciples ...determined to send relief unto the brethren which dwelt in Judea," that is, they resolved or purposed beforehand to do it; Acts 17:26, "God ...'hath determined' the times before appointed and fixed," etc. In all these places there is the idea of a purpose, intention, or plan implying intention, and marking out or fixing the boundaries to some future action or evens. The word implies that the death of Jesus was resolved by God before it took place. And this truth is established by all the predictions made in the Old Testament, and by the Saviour himself. God was not compelled to give up his Son. There was no claim on him for it. He had a right, therefore, to determine when and how it should be done. The fact, moreover, that this was predicted, shows that it was fixed or resolved on. No event can be foretold, evidently, unless it be certain that it will take place. The event, therefore, must in some way be fixed or resolved on beforehand,

Counsel - βουλή boulē. This word properly denotes "purpose, decree, will." It expresses the act of the mind in willing, or the purpose or design which is formed. Here it means the purpose or will of God; it was his plan or decree that Jesus should be delivered: Acts 4:28, "For to do whatsoever thy hand and thy counsel ἡ βουλή σου hē boulē sou determined before to be done"; Ephesians 1:11, "Who worketh all things after the counsel of his own will"; Hebrews 6:17, "God willing ...to show ...the immutability of his counsel." See Acts 20:27; 1 Corinthians 4:5; Luke 23:51. The word here, therefore, proves that Jesus was delivered by the deliberate purpose of God; that it was according to his previous intention and design. The reason why this was insisted on by Peter was that he might convince the Jews that Jesus was not delivered by weakness, or because he was unable to rescue himself. Such an opinion would have been inconsistent with the belief that he was the Messiah. It was important, then, to assert the dignity of Jesus, and to show that his death was in accordance with the fixed design of God, and therefore that it did not interfere in the least with his claims to be the Messiah. The same thing our Saviour has himself expressly affirmed, John 19:10-11; John 10:18; Matthew 26:53.

Foreknowledge - This word denotes "the seeing beforehand of an event yet to take place." It implies:

  1. Omniscience; and,

  2. That the event is fixed and certain.

To foresee a contingent event, that is, to foresee that an event will take place when it may or may not take place, is an absurdity. Foreknowledge, therefore, implies that for some reason the event will certainly take place. What that reason As, however, God is represented in the Scriptures as purposing or determining future events; as they could not be foreseen by him unless he had so determined, so the word sometimes is used in the sense of determining beforehand, or as synonymous with decreeing, Romans 8:29; Romans 11:2. In this place the word is used to denote that the delivering up of Jesus was something more than a bare or naked decree. It implies that God did it according to his foresight of what would be the best time, place, and manner of its being done. It was not the result merely of will; it was will directed by a wise foreknowledge of what would be best. And this is the case with all the decrees of God. It follows from this that the conduct of the Jews was foreknown. God was not disappointed in anything respecting their treatment of his Son, nor will he be disappointed in any of the actions of people. Notwithstanding the wickedness of the world, his counsel shall stand, and he will do all his pleasure, Isaiah 46:10.

Ye have taken - See Matthew 26:57. Ye Jews have taken. It is possible that some were present on this occasion who had been personally concerned in taking Jesus, and many who had joined in the cry, "Crucify him, Luke 23:18-21. It was, at any rate, the act of the Jewish people by which this had been done. This was a striking instance of the fidelity of that preaching which says, as Nathan did to David, "Thou art the man!" Peter, once so timid that he denied his Lord, now charged this atrocious crime to his countrymen, regardless of their anger and his own danger. He did not deal in general accusations, but brought the charges home, and declared that they were the people who had been concerned in this amazing crime. No preaching can be successful that does not charge to people their personal guilt, and that does not fearlessly proclaim their ruin and danger.

By wicked hands - Greek: "through or by the hands of the lawless or wicked." This refers, doubtless, to Pilate and the Roman soldiers, through whose instrumentality this had been done. The reasons for supposing that this is the true interpretation of the passage are these:

(1) The Jews had not the power of inflicting death themselves.

(2) the term used here, "wicked," ἀνόμων anomōn, is not applicable to the Jews, but to the Romans. It properly means lawless, or those who had not the Law, and is often applied to the pagan, Romans 2:12, Romans 2:14; 1 Corinthians 9:21.

(3) the punishment which was inflicted was a Roman punishment.

(4) it was a matter of fact that the Jews, though they had condemned him, yet had not put him to death themselves, but had demanded it of the Romans. But, though they had employed the Romans to do it, still they were the prime movers in the deed; they had plotted, and compassed, and demanded his death, and they were, therefore, not the less guilty. The maxim of the common law and of common sense is, "He who does a deed by the instrumentality of another is responsible for it." It was from no merit of the Jews that they had not put him to death themselves. It was simply because the power was taken away from them.

Have crucified - Greek: "Having affixed him to the cross, ye have put him to death." Peter here charges the crime fully on them. Their guilt was not diminished because they had employed others to do it. From this we may remark:

  1. That this was one of the most amazing and awful crimes that could be charged to any people. It was malice, and treason, and hatred, and murder combined. Nor was it any common murder. It was their own Messiah whom they had put to death; the hope of their fathers; he who had been long promised by God, and the prospect of whose coming had so long cheered and animated the nation. They had now imbrued their hands in his blood, and stood charged with the awful crime of having murdered the Prince of Peace.

  2. It is no mitigation of guilt that we do it by the instrumentality of others. It is often, if not always, a deepening and extending of the crime.

  3. We have here a striking and clear instance of the doctrine that the decrees of God do not interfere with the free agency of people. This event was certainly determined beforehand. Nothing is clearer than this. It is here expressly asserted; and it had been foretold with undeviating certainty by the prophets. God had, for wise and gracious purposes, purposed or decreed in his own mind that his Son should die at the time and in the manner in which he did; for all the circumstances of his death, as well as of his birth and his life, were foretold; and yet in this the Jews and the Romans never supposed or alleged that they were compelled or cramped in what they did. They did what they chose. If in this case the decrees of God were not inconsistent with human freedom, neither can they be in any case. Between those decrees and the freedom of man there is no inconsistency, unless it could be shown - what never can be that God compels people to act contrary to their own will. In such a case there could be no freedom. But that is not the case with regard to the decrees of God. An act is what it is in itself; it can be contemplated and measured by itself. That it was foreseen, foreknown, or purposed does not alter its nature, anymore than it does that it be remembered after it is performed. The memory of what we have done does not destroy our freedom. "Our own purposes" in relation to our conduct do not destroy our freedom; nor can the purposes or designs of any other being violate one free moral action, unless he compels us to do a thing against our will.

  4. We have here a proof that the decrees of God do not take away the moral character of an action. It does not prove that an action is innocent if it is shown that it is a part of the wise plan of God to permit it, Never was there a more atrocious crime than the crucifixion of the Son of God; and yet it was determined on in the divine counsels. So with all the deeds of human guilt. The purpose of God to permit them does not destroy their nature or make them innocent. They are what they are in themselves. The purpose of God does not change their character; and if it is right to push them in fact, they will be punished. If it is right for God to punish them, it was right to resolve to do it. The sinner must answer for his sins, not for the plans of his Maker; nor can he take shelter in the day of wrath against what he deserves in the plea that God has determined future events. If any people could have done it, it would have been those whom Peter addressed; yet neither he nor they felt that their guilt was in the least diminished by the fact that Jesus was "delivered by the determinate counsel and foreknowledge of God."

  5. If this event was predetermined; if that act of amazing wickedness, when the Son of God was put to death, was fixed by the determinate counsel of God, then all the events leading to it, and the circumstances attending it, were also a part of the decree. The one could not be determined without the other.

  6. If that event was determined, then others may also be consistently with human freedom and responsibility. There can be no deed of wickedness that will surpass that of crucifying the Son of God, and if the acts of his murderers were a part of the wise counsel of God, then on the same principle are we to suppose that all events are under his direction, and ordered by a purpose infinitely wise and good.

  7. If the Jews could not take shelter from the charge of wickedness under the plea that it was foreordained, then no stoners can do it. This was as clear a case as can ever occur; and yet the apostle did not intimate that an excuse or mitigation for their sin could be pled from this cause. This case, therefore, meets all the excuses of sinners from this plea, and proves that those excuses will not avail them or save them in the day of judgment.

24

Acts 2:24

Open passage

简体中文

神叫他复活——这是彼得在这部分论证中想要确立的主要之点。他无法否认弥赛亚曾以屈辱的方式被处死这一事实。但他现在向他们表明,神也已经叫他复活了;神就此印证了他的教训,并且按照主耶稣死前所作的应许,将他的圣灵降下来。

解除了死的痛苦——译作“解除了”(loosed)的词 λύσας lusas 与“捆绑”相对,本来适用于绳子,或任何被捆绑之物。参见 Matthew 21:2;Mark 1:7。因此,这个词的意思是释放或使自由,见 Luke 13:16;1 Corinthians 7:27。这里正是在这个意义上使用的;不过,解开或松开绑带的观念仍然保留着,因为译作“痛苦”的那个词,常常意为“绳索或绑带”。

死的痛苦——ὠδῖνας τοῦ θανάτου odinas tou thanatou。译作“痛苦”的词,本义是“分娩的剧痛”,进而指任何剧烈的、撕裂般的疼痛。因此它也应用于死亡,因为死亡是一种极度痛苦的状态。这个词所翻译的希伯来原词,还有一个十分常见的意思,就是绳索或绑带。这大概就是该词最初的观念;希伯来人用紧紧束住、捆绑并勒紧肢体、引起剧痛的绑带或绳索的意象,来表达任何极度的痛苦。这样,死亡就被描绘成这样一幅捆绑的图景:它拘禁人,紧紧压住人,使人无法逃脱,并带来极大的痛苦。关于 חבל chebel 一词的这种用法,参见 Psalm 119:61;Isaiah 66:7;Jeremiah 22:23;Hosea 13:13。它也应用于死亡:Psalm 18:5,“死亡的网络临到了我”;这与该节前半部分的“痛苦”(sorrows)一词相对应;Psalm 116:3,“死亡的绳索缠绕我,阴间的痛苦(即 Hades 或 Sheol——那把我捆绑在坟墓里的绳索或痛苦)抓住我”。

我们不可由此推断,我们的主在死后还受了什么苦。这只是说,坟墓不能拘禁他,神解开了那把他拘禁在其中的捆绑;他曾被这些痛苦或捆绑所环绕,直到被带到坟墓里,而如今神释放了他。痛苦——巨大的痛苦——将像我们无法解开的绳索的勒束与捆绑一样环绕我们众人,把我们的四肢和身体牢牢缚在坟墓里。这些绑带在人生早期就开始缠上我们,并且越勒越紧,直到我们躺在痛苦的病床上、在紧束之下喘息,然后在坟墓里归于沉寂、不能动弹——我们被制服的样子,与巨蟒缠绕中的老虎在垂死挣扎中所受的致命苦楚颇为相似,又像拉奥孔(Laocoon)和他的儿子们被来自特涅多斯岛(Tenedos)的毒蛇缠住时一样。

他原不能被死拘禁——这不是指任何自然律上的不可能,也不是指耶稣身体本身内含的什么功效或能力,而只是说“就当时的情形而言,这样的事不可能发生”。为什么不可能,他随即就加以说明。因为这事无法与圣经的诸应许相一致。耶稣是“生命的主”(Acts 3:15);生命在他里头(John 1:4;John 5:26);他有权柄舍去自己的生命,也有权柄再取回来(Judges 10:18);因此,他必须复活。而且,他来正是要借着死败坏那掌死权的,就是魔鬼(Hebrews 2:14);既然得着这场胜利正是他的目的,他就不可能因被拘禁在坟墓中而在这一事业上遭到挫败。

English original

Whom God hath raised up - This was the main point, in this part of his argument, which Peter wished to establish. He could not but admit that the Messiah had been in an ignominious manner put to death. But he now shows them that God had also raised him up; had thus given his attestation to his doctrine; and had sent down his Spirit according to the promise which the Lord Jesus made before his death.

Having loosed the pains of death - The word "loosed," λύσας lusas, is opposed to bind, and is properly applied to a cord, or to anything which is bound. See Matthew 21:2; Mark 1:7. Hence, it means to free or to liberate, Luke 13:16; 1 Corinthians 7:27. It is used in this sense here; though the idea of untying or loosing a band is retained, because the word translated "pains" often means "a cord or band."

The pains of death - ὠδῖνας τοῦ θάνατου ōdinas tou thanatou. The word translated "pains" denotes properly "the extreme sufferings of parturition, and then any severe or excruciating pangs." Hence, it is applied also to death, as being a state of extreme suffering. A very frequent meaning of the Hebrew word of which this is the translation is cord or band. This, perhaps, was the original idea of the word; and the Hebrews expressed any extreme agony under the idea of bands or cords closely drawn, binding and constricting the limbs, and producing severe pain. Thus, death was represented under this image of a band that confined people, that pressed closely on them, that prevented escape, and produced severe suffering. For this use of the word חבל chebel, see Psalm 119:61; Isaiah 66:7; Jeremiah 22:23; Hosea 13:13. It is applied to death, Psalm 18:5, "The snares of death prevented me"; corresponding to the word "sorrows" in the previous part of the verse; Psalm 116:3, "The sorrows of death compassed me, and the pains of hell (Hades or Sheol, the cords or pains that were binding me down to the grave) gat held on me."

We are not to infer from this that our Lord suffered anything after death. It means simply that he could not be held by the grave, but that God loosed the bonds which had held him there; that he now set him free who had been encompassed by these pains or bonds until they had brought him down to the grave. Pain, mighty pain, will encompass us all like the constrictions and bindings of a cord which we cannot loose, and will fasten our limbs and bodies in the grave. Those bands begin to be thrown around us in early life, and they are drawn closer and closer, until we lie panting under the stricture on a bed of pain, and then are still and immovable in the grave - subdued in a manner not a little resembling the mortal agonies of the tiger in the convolutions of the boa constrictor, or like Laocoon and his sons in the folds of the serpents from the Island of Tenedos.

It was not possible - This does not refer to any natural impossibility, or to any inherent efficacy or power in the body of Jesus itself, but simply means that "in the circumstances of the case such an event could not be." Why it could not be he proceeds at once to show. It could not be consistently with the promises of the Scriptures. Jesus was the "Prince of life" Acts 3:15; he had life in himself John 1:4; John 5:26; he had power to lay down his life and to take it again Judges 10:18; and it was indispensable that he should rise. He came, also, that through death he might destroy him that had the power of death that is, the devil Hebrews 2:14; and as it was his purpose to gain this victory, he could not be defeated in it by being confined to the grave.

25

Acts 2:25

Open passage

简体中文

大卫指着他说……——彼得进而引用旧约来证明弥赛亚必须从死里复活这一教义。这段经文取自 Psalm 16:8-11,引自七十士译本的希腊文版本,只有一处轻微而无关紧要的变动;而且如下文将看到的,与希伯来原文也没有实质的出入。这篇诗篇能在何种意义上应用于基督,将在我们考察彼得所引的各句话之后显明。

我看见主——这是一个欠妥的译法。“预见主常在我们面前”传达不出什么明确的意思,尽管它可能是这节经文的直译。这个词的意思是“预见”,其次是“看在我们面前”,即“看为与我们同在,看为临近”。因此它含有“把信心放在一位身上;倚靠他,或指望从他得帮助”的意思。这里是这个意思。希伯来文作“我期望,或我等候”。它表达一个无助、依赖之人等候神帮助的祈求。这词在旧约中常这样使用。

常在我眼前——即常常同在,为要帮助我,救我脱离一切的患难。

他在我右边——“在旁”就是在近处,随时帮助。提到右边,是因为那是尊贵荣耀的位置。大卫不单要说他在近处帮助他,更是说他占有尊荣的位置,在他心中最高的位置(Psalm 109:31)。我们倚靠神的时候,也当高举他;不应仅仅看他为我们的帮助,同时更当把心中最高的位置归给他。

叫我不至于摇动——即没有大灾大祸会临到我,使我能站立稳固。这说法指“陷于灾祸之中,或落入仇敌的权势之下”(Psalm 62:2, Psalm 62:6; Psalm 46:6)。这表达了一个身处大灾难危险之中、单单倚靠神帮助之人的信心。

English original

For Daniel speaketh ... - This doctrine that the Messiah must rise from the dead Peter proceeds to prove by a quotation from the Old Testament. This passage is taken from Psalm 16:8-11. It is made from the Greek version of the Septuagint, with only one slight and unimportant change. Nor is there any material change, as will be seen, from the Hebrew. In what sense this Psalm can be applied to Christ will be seen after we have examined the expressions which Peter alleges.

I foresaw the Lord - This is an unhappy translation. To foresee the Lord always before us conveys no idea, though it may be a literal translation of the passage. The word means "to foresee," and then "to see before us," that is, "as present with us, to regard as being near." It thus implies "to put confidence in one; to rely on him, or expect assistance from him." This is its meaning here. The Hebrew is, "I expected, or waited for." It thus expresses the petition of one who is helpless and dependent, who waits for help from God. It is often thus used in the Old Testament.

Always before my face - As being always present to help me, and to deliver me out of all my troubles.

He is on my right hand - To be at hand is to be near to afford help. The right hand is mentioned because that was the place of dignity and honor. David did not design simply to say that he was near to help him, but that he had the place of honor, the highest place in his affections, Psalm 109:31. In our dependence on God we should exalt him. We should not merely regard him as our help, but should at the same time give him the highest place in our affections.

That I should not be moved - That is, that no great evil or calamity should happen to me; that I may stand firm. The phrase denotes "to sink into calamities, or to fall into the power of enemies," Psalm 62:2, Psalm 62:6; Psalm 46:6. This expresses the confidence of one who is in danger of great calamities, and who puts his trust in the help of God alone.

25-28

Untitled

Open passage

简体中文

English original

26

Acts 2:26

Open passage

简体中文

所以——彼得把这些话归于弥赛亚。他所以欢欣快乐,原因在于他将在临到自己的忧患中蒙保守,并能仰望那等候着他的胜利。因此,保罗在 Hebrews 12:2 说,耶稣"因那摆在前面的喜乐,就轻看羞辱,忍受了十字架的苦难"。纵观整个新约,他受苦的羞辱与忧伤都被视为与他的荣耀和胜利相连,Luke 24:26; Philippians 2:6-9; Ephesians 1:20-21。在这一点上,我们的救主给我们留下了榜样,叫我们跟随他的脚踪行。将来荣耀与胜利的盼望,应当在一切患难中扶持我们,并使我们像他一样,甘愿躺卧在坟墓的朽坏之中。

我心里欢喜——在希伯来文中,这里是现在时态,即"我的心欢喜"。"心"一词在这里表达"那个人",等于说"我欢喜"。希伯来人惯用身体的不同肢体来表达整个人。我们也是这样说:"所有的性命都丧亡了;那船上有四十只手;聪明的头脑不作此想;钢铁般的心决不退缩"等等。(Prof. Stuart 论 Psalm 16:1-11)其意思是:因为在灾祸之时神亲近我,必扶持我、搭救我,所以我不致惊惶,也不惧怕,反倒要因着展望将来、仰望那"摆在我前面的喜乐"而欢欣。

我的舌快乐——希伯来文作"我的荣耀"或"我的尊荣快乐"。这词用以表示"威严、光彩、尊贵、尊荣",也用来表达心或灵魂:或因为心是人尊严的主要来源,或因为这词也用以表达肝脏——希伯来人视之为情感之所在,Genesis 49:6:"我的荣耀啊,你不要与他们的会联合"——即我的灵魂,或我自己;Psalm 57:8:"我的荣耀啊,你要醒起";Psalm 108:1:"我要……用我的荣耀歌颂"。七十士译本把这词译作"舌"。阿拉伯文译本和拉丁文武加大译本也是如此。他们为何这样使用这词,并不清楚。或许是因为舌头,即言语的恩赐,最能为人的尊荣增色,并将人与兽类分别出来。"荣耀"一词在 Psalm 30:12 中明确用作"舌"的意思:"好叫我的荣耀歌颂你,并不住声。"

并且——意即"实在如此";此外还有。

我的肉身——即我的身体。见 Acts 2:31; 1 Corinthians 5:5。这里严格说来,指与灵魂分开的身体,即死去的身体。

安居——即在坟墓中安息、安卧,免于朽坏。

在指望中——即怀着对复活的确定期盼。希伯来文的这词所表达的,与其说是盼望,不如说是确信。这段经文的意思是:"我要将我的身体交托于坟墓,并怀着对将来的确定期盼——坚信它必不见朽坏,必要被兴起。"因此,这表达了那垂死之弥赛亚的心情,表达了他确知自己在坟墓中的安息不会长久,必要终结。基督徒的死在新约中同样被描述为睡了,是安息,Acts 7:60; 1 Corinthians 15:6, 1 Corinthians 15:18; 1 Thessalonians 4:13, 1 Thessalonians 4:15; 2 Peter 3:4;他们也可以效法他们主的榜样,在指望中将自己的身体交托尘土。他们将在蒙福复活的确据之下躺卧在坟墓里;虽然他们的身体不像他的身体,必朽坏归于本源的尘土,但这必朽坏的必要穿上不朽坏的,这必死的必要穿上不死的,1 Corinthians 15:53。

English original

Therefore - Peter ascribes these expressions to the Messiah. The reason why he would exult or rejoice was, that he would be preserved amidst the sorrows that were coming on him, and could look forward to the triumph that awaited him. Thus, Paul says Hebrews 12:2 that "Jesus ..."for the joy that was set before him," endured the cross, despising the shame," etc. Throughout the New Testament, the shame and sorrow of his sufferings were regarded as connected with his glory and his triumph, Luke 24:26; Philippians 2:6-9; Ephesians 1:20-21. In this our Saviour has left us an example that we should walk in his steps. The prospect of future glory and triumph should sustain us amidst all afflictions, and make us ready, like him, to lie down in even the corruptions of the grave.

Did my heart rejoice - In the Hebrew this is in the prescott tense, "my heart rejoices." The word "heart" here expresses "the person," and is the same as saying "I rejoice." The Hebrews used the different members to express the person. And thus we say, "every soul perished; the vessel had 40 hands; wise heads do not think so; hearts of steel will not flinch," etc. (Prof. Stuart on Psalm 16:1-11). The meaning is, because God is near me in time of calamity, and will support and deliver me, I will not be agitated or fear, but will exult in the prospect of the future, in view of the "joy that is set before me."

My tongue was glad - Hebrew, My glory or my honor exults. The word is used to denote "majesty, splendor, dignity, honor." It is also used to express the heart or soul, either because that is the chief source of man's dignity, or because the word is also expressive of the liver, regarded by the Hebrews as the seat of the affections, Genesis 49:6, "Unto their assembly, mine honor," that is, my soul, or myself, "be not thou united"; Psalm 57:8, "Awake up, my glory," etc.; Psalm 108:1, "I will sing ...even with my glory." This word the Septuagint translated "tongue." The Arabic and Latin Vulgate have also done the same. Why they thus use the word is not clear. It may be because the tongue, or the gift of speech, was what chiefly contributes to the honor of man, or distinguishes him from the brutal creation. The word "glory" is used expressly for "tongue" in Psalm 30:12; "To the end that my glory may sing praise to thee, and not be silent."

Moreover also - Truly; in addition to this.

My flesh - My body. See Acts 2:31; 1 Corinthians 5:5. It means here properly the body separate from the soul; the dead body.

Shall rest - Shall rest or repose in the grave, free from corruption.

In hope - In confident expectation of a resurrection. The Hebrew word rather expresses confidence than hope. The passage means, "My body will I commit to the grave, with a confident expectation of the future, that is, with a firm belief that it will not see corruption, but will be raised up." It thus expresses the feelings of the dying Messiah; the assured confidence which he had that his repose in the grave would not be long, and would certainly come to an end. The death of Christians is also in the New Testament represented as a sleep, and as repose Acts 7:60; 1 Corinthians 15:6, 1 Corinthians 15:18; 1 Thessalonians 4:13, 1 Thessalonians 4:15; 2 Peter 3:4; and they may also, after the example of their Lord, commit their bodies to the dust, in hope. They will lie in the grave under the assurance of a happy resurrection; and though their bodies, unlike his, will moulder to their native dust, yet this corruptible will put on incorruption, and this mortal will put on immorality, 1 Corinthians 15:53.

27

Acts 2:27

Open passage

简体中文

你必不将我的灵魂撇在阴间——“灵魂”(soul)一词在我们的用语中,是指人“有思想的、不朽的部分”,无论它与身体联合存在还是分离存在,都可以如此称呼。然而,此处译作“灵魂”的希伯来词 נפשׁ nephesh,却可以意为“灵、心思、生命”,在这里所指的可能不过是“我”或“我自己”而已。该词的本义是“气息”;继而有“生命”或“生命原理、活物”之意;再进而指“灵魂、灵、思想的部分”。它用来指代人本身、意即“我”或“我自己”的例子,可见于 Psalm 11:1;Psalm 35:3、Psalm 35:7;Job 9:21。它被用来指灵魂脱离身体、单独存在的状态,则没有明确的例子。在这处经文里,它的意义必须部分地按“阴间”(hell)一词的意义来解释。如果那词指坟墓,那么这个词多半就是指“我”:你必不将我撇在坟墓中。其意义大概是:“你必不将我撇在阴间(Sheol),也不……”等等。“撇下”(leave)一词在这里的意思是:你不会把我交给它,不会把我交付于它的权下受辖制。

在阴间(In hell)——即 εἰς ᾅδου eis Hadou。“阴间”(hell)这个英文字,如今通常指“恶人将来受永刑的地方”。这个意义是它经过长期使用而逐渐获得的。它是一个撒克逊词,源出 helan(遮盖)一词,字面意思是“被遮盖的深陷之处”(Webster);继而有“亡灵所居的幽暗阴沉之境”的意思;再进而指“受苦之地”。按我们如今对这词的用法,它决不能表达原文的力量;我们若带着这种观念来读眼前这样的经文,就会得出完全错误的意思,尽管这个英文字从前所表达的,或许并不超过原文。希腊文 Hades 一词的字面意思是“没有光的地方;幽暗不明之处”,在希腊作家笔下,它指那幽暗隐秘的区域,即人们认为脱离躯壳的灵所居住的地方。该词在新约中仅出现十一次。在这处经文里,它是希伯来文 שׁאול Sheowl 的译词。

在 Revelation 20:13-14 里,它与死亡相连:“死亡和阴间(Hades)也交出其中的死人”;“死亡和阴间(Hades)也被扔在火湖里”。另见 Revelation 6:8;Revelation 1:18:“我……拿着死亡和阴间的钥匙。”在 1 Corinthians 15:55 里,它指坟墓:“死啊(Hades),你得胜的权势在哪里?”在 Matthew 11:23 里,它指一个深陷之处,与高举之处相对;指灾祸与降卑的境况,与先前的极大兴盛相对:“迦百农啊,你已经升到天上,将来必坠落阴间(Hades)。”在 Luke 16:23 里,它指财主死后受刑之处:“他在阴间(Hades)受痛苦,举目……”在这处经文里,它与受苦的观念相连,无疑是指受刑罚之处。七十士译本通常用这个词来翻译 שׁאול Shèowl 一词。

有一次,它被用来翻译“坑中石头”这个短语(Isaiah 14:19);有两次用来表达沉默,尤其指坟墓的沉默(Psalm 94:17;Psalm 115:17);有一次用来表达希伯来文中“死亡的阴影”(Job 38:17);另有六十次用来翻译 Sheol 一词。值得注意的是,在旧约里它从未被用来翻译 קבר qeber 一词,而那才是确切指“坟墓或墓穴”的词。Sheol 或 Hades 一词所传达的观念,严格说并不是坟墓或墓穴,而是那幽暗不明的境界——包括坟墓在内——即构成死者辖域的状态。希伯来人对未来世界持有什么观念,如今已难以说明,就眼前的情形而言也无此必要。这个词起初仅指“死人的状态、坟墓那贪得无厌的索求”,后来随着他们领受新的启示,或对未来世界形成新的见解,其含义便逐渐扩展。这词在旧约中获得如今所见的种种特殊意义,其思想过程或许如下:

(1) “死亡”一词和坟墓 קבר qeber,表达的是已死身体在土中的居所。

(2) 人有灵魂,有思想的本原,于是必然产生疑问:它将处于什么状态?它也会死吗?希伯来人似乎从未这样相信。它会立刻升到天上吗?关于这一点,他们起初并没有认识。它会立即去往福乐之地或受苦之地吗?这一点他们起初也无从知晓。然而他们认定它仍要活着;而 שׁאול Sheowl 一词所表达的正是这种状态——死者所居的幽暗不明之境;无论善恶,诸灵的居所;逝者所在之处,无论是安居于固定的居所,还是四处飘流。由于他们不知道大地的大小和球形构造,他们似乎以为这境界位于大地之内,远在我们以下;因此它与天相对(Psalm 139:8):“我若升到天上,你在那里;我若在阴间(Sheol)下榻,你也在那里”;另见 Amos 9:2。因此,这词最常见的用法,是表达那些幽暗之境、下层世界、幽魂之域等。这类例子几乎不可胜数。其中最醒目、最庄严的一例见 Isaiah 14:9:“你下到阴间,阴间就因你震动,来迎接你”等;那里把聚集的死者描绘为在巴比伦王死亡之时,在他们广大的境界里全都震动起来。

(3) 随之而来的问题是:这一切死者是否都幸福。这一点已由启示裁定,而且是在旧约里裁定的。然而,这词用来表达恶人死后的光景,比表达义人的光景更为贴切。它传达的是幽暗、阴沉、飘流的观念;是一种愁惨而无定所的光景,与天迥然不同。因此,这词有时表达受刑之地的观念:Psalm 9:17:“恶人……都必归到阴间”等;另有 Proverbs 15:11;Proverbs 23:14;Proverbs 27:20;Job 26:6。因此,这词虽然在严格意义上并非指坟墓或墓穴,却常常指“死人的状态”,既不指明是在福乐中还是在祸患中,却隐含灵魂继续存在的意思。在这层意义上,它常用于旧约,希伯来词为 Sheol,希腊词为 Hades:Genesis 37:35:“我必悲哀着下阴间,到我儿子那里”——即我要下到死者那里,下到死亡那里,到我儿子那里,而他仍在那里;Genesis 42:38;Genesis 44:29:“那便是你们使我白发苍苍、悲悲惨惨地下阴间去了”;Numbers 16:30、Numbers 16:33;1 Kings 2:6、1 Kings 2:9;等等。

因此,在我们眼前这处经文里,其意义不过是:你必不将我撇在死人之中。这已传达了全部意思。它并不是按字面指坟墓或墓穴;那只是关乎身体。这表达所指的是已死的弥赛亚:你必不将他撇在死人之中;你必要叫他复活。基督“降在阴间”——正如信经(the Creed)所表述的——这一教义,或许正是由这段经文、再辅以另外两处(Romans 10:7 与 1 Peter 3:19)而产生的;许多人就他到灭亡之灵中间去一事,杜撰了种种怪异的见解。罗马天主教会的教义一向是:他去了炼狱,要释放被囚在那里的灵魂。但若如今所给出的解释正确,那么便可推出:

(1) 这里丝毫没有论到基督属人的灵魂在他死后归于何处。他去了死人之境,这一点是隐含的,但也仅此而已。

(2) 可以指出,圣经对于他的灵魂在他死与复活之间那段时间的状态,并没有任何宣告。圣经中关于这题目仅有的暗示,只会让我们推想他当时处于福乐之中。他对那临死的强盗说:“今日你要同我在乐园里了。”耶稣断气时说:“成了”;他这样说,无疑是指他为人得救赎所受的苦难与劳碌已经完结。凡臆测他死后仍有任何劳碌或痛苦的,都是无稽之谈,在新约里没有丝毫依据。

你的圣者(Thine Holy One)——希伯来文中在此译作“圣者”的那个词,本义是“温柔而敬虔地投身于另一位的一位”,相当于新约里“我的爱子”这一表述。它也被用来——正如七十士译本和彼得在此处的用法——指“一位圣洁者,即被分别出来归给神的一位”。在这层意义上,它应用于基督,或因他被分别出来承担这职分,或因他如此纯洁,以至用“那圣者”或“神的圣者”这样卓越的称呼来指称他是合宜的。这词有几次被用作弥赛亚广为人知的称号:Mark 1:24:“我知道你是谁,乃是神的圣者”;Luke 4:34;Acts 3:14:“你们弃绝了那圣洁公义者”等。另见 Luke 1:35:“所要生的圣者,必称为神的儿子。”

见朽坏(To see corruption)——“见朽坏”就是经历朽坏、承受朽坏。希伯来人常用与感官相关的词语来表达经历某事,如“尝死味”、“见死”等。这里的“朽坏”指坟墓中的腐坏。诗篇里所用的词 שׁחת shachath 正是这样用于 Job 17:14:“我对朽坏说:你是我的父亲”等。此处所用的希腊文词正是这个意思,如 Acts 13:34-37 中的用法。这个意义可以恰当地由希伯来文原词暗示出来,古时的译本也是如此理解的。这表达所隐含的意义是:诗篇所论到的那位必要重新得生命;彼得接下来就要证明,这些话必然具有这个意义。

English original

Thou wilt not leave my soul - The word "soul," with us, means "the thinking, the immortal part of man," and is applied to it whether existing in connection with the body or separate from it. The Hebrew word translated "soul" here, נפשׁ nephesh, however, may mean "spirit, mind, life," and may denote here nothing more than "me" or "myself." It means, properly, "breath"; then "life," or "the vital principle, a living being"; then "the soul, the spirit, the thinking part." Instances where it is put for the individual himself, meaning "me" or "myself" may be seen in Psalm 11:1; Psalm 35:3, Psalm 35:7; Job 9:21. There is no clear instance in which it is applied to the soul in its separate state, or disjoined from the body. In this place it must be explained in part by the meaning of the word hell. If that means grave, then this word probably means "me"; thou wilt not leave me in the grave. The meaning probably is, "Thou wilt not leave me in Sheol, neither," etc. The word "leave" here means, "Thou wilt not resign me to, or wilt not give me over to it, to be held under its power."

In hell - - εἰς ᾅδου eis Hadou. The word "hell," in English, now commonly denotes "the place of the future eternal punishment of the wicked." This sense it has acquired by long usage. It is a Saxon word, derived from helan, "to cover," and denotes literally "a covered or deep place" (Webster); then "the dark and dismal abode of departed spirits"; and then "the place of torment." As the word is used now by us, it by no means expresses the force of the original; and if with this idea we read a passage like the one before us, it would convey an erroneous meaning altogether, although formerly the English word perhaps expressed no more than the original. The Greek word "Hades" means literally "a place devoid of light; a dark, obscure abode"; and in Greek writers was applied to the dark and obscure regions where disembodied spirits were supposed to dwell. It occurs only eleven times in the New Testament. In this place it is the translation of the Hebrew שׁאול Sheowl.

In Revelation 20:13-14, it is connected with death: "And death and hell (Hades) delivered up the dead which were in them"; "And death and hell (Hades) were cast into the lake of fire." See also Revelation 6:8; Revelation 1:18, "I have the keys of hell and death." In 1 Corinthians 15:55 it means the grave: "O grave (Hades), where is thy victory?" In Matthew 11:23 it means a deep, profound place, opposed to an exalted one; a condition of calamity and degradation, opposed to former great prosperity: "Thou, Capernaum, which art exalted to heaven, shalt be thrust down to hell" (Hades). In Luke 16:23 it is applied to the place where the rich man was after death, in a state of punishment: "In hell (Hades) he lifted up his eyes, being in torments." In this place it is connected with the idea of suffering, and undoubtedly denotes a place of punishment. The Septuagint has used this word commonly to translate the word שׁאול Shèowl.

Once it is used as a translation of the phrase "the stones of the pit" Isaiah 14:19; twice to express silence, particularly the silence of the grave Psalm 94:17; Psalm 115:17; once to express the Hebrew for "the shadow of death" Job 38:17; and sixty times to translate the word Sheol. It is remarkable that it is never used in the Old Testament to denote the word קבר qeber, which properly denotes "a grave or sepulchre." The idea which was conveyed by the word Sheol, or Hades, was not properly a grave or sepulchre, but that dark, unknown state, including the grave, which constituted the dominions of the dead. What idea the Hebrews had of the future world it is now difficult to explain, and is not necessary in the case before us. The word originally denoting simply "the state of the dead, the insatiable demands of the grave," came at last to be extended in its meaning, in proportion as they received new revelations or formed new opinions about the future world. Perhaps the following may be the process of thought by which the word came to have the special meanings which it is found to have in the Old Testament:

(1) The word "death" and the grave קבר qeber would express the abode of a deceased body in the earth.

(2) man has a soul, a thinking principle, and the inquiry must arise, What will be its state? Will it die also? The Hebrews never appear to have believed that. Will it ascend to heaven at once? On that subject they had at first no knowledge. Will it go at once to a place of happiness or of torment? Of that, also, they had no information at first Yet they supposed it would live; and the word שׁאול Sheowl expressed just this state - the dark, unknown regions of the dead; the abode of spirits, whether good or bad; the residence of departed people, whether fixed in a permanent habitation, or whether wandering about. As they were ignorant of the size and spherical structure of the earth, they seem to have supposed this region to be situated in the earth, far below us, and hence, it is put in opposition to heaven, Psalm 139:8, "If I ascend up into heaven, thou art there; if I make my bed in hell (Sheol), behold, thou art there"; Amos 9:2. The most common use of the word is, therefore, to express those dark regions, the lower world, the region of ghosts, etc. Instances of this, almost without number, might be given. See a most striking and sublime instance of this in Isaiah 14:9; "Hell from beneath is moved to meet thee," etc.; where the assembled dead are represented as being agitated in all their vast regions at the death of the King of Babylon.

(3) the inquiry could not but arise whether all these beings were happy. This point revelation decided; and it was decided in the O d Testament. Yet this word would better express the state of the wicked dead than the righteous. It conveyed the idea of darkness, gloom, wandering; the idea of a sad and unfixed abode, unlike heaven. Hence, the word sometimes expresses the idea of a place of punishment: Psalm 9:17, "The wicked shall be turned into hell," etc.; Proverbs 15:11; Proverbs 23:14; Proverbs 27:20; Job 26:6. While, therefore, the word does not mean properly a grave or a sepulchre, it does mean often "the state of the dead," without designating whether in happiness or woe, but implying the continued existence of the soul. In this sense it is often used in the Old Testament, where the Hebrew word is Sheol, and the Greek Hades: Genesis 37:35, "I will go down into the grave, unto my son, mourning" I will go down to the dead, to death, to my son, still there existing; Genesis 42:38; Genesis 44:29, "He shall bring down my gray hairs with sorrow to the grave; Numbers 16:30, Numbers 16:33; 1 Kings 2:6, 1 Kings 2:9; etc. etc. in the place before us, therefore, the meaning is simply, thou wilt not leave me among the dead. This conveys all the idea. It does not mean literally the grave or the sepulchre; that relates only to the body. This expression refers to the deceased Messiah. Thou wilt not leave him among the dead; thou wilt raise him up. It is from this passage, perhaps, aided by two others (Romans 10:7, and 1 Peter 3:19), that the doctrine originated that Christ "descended," as it is expressed in the Creed, "into hell"; and many have invented strange opinions about his going among lost spirits. The doctrine of the Roman Catholic Church has been that he went to purgatory, to deliver the spirits confined there. But if the interpretation now given be correct, then it will follow:

(1) That nothing is affirmed here about the destination of the human soul of Christ after his death. That he went to the region of the dead is implied, but nothing further.

(2) It may be remarked that the Scriptures affirm nothing about the state of his soul in that time which intervened between his death and resurrection. The only intimation which occurs on the subject is such as to leave us to suppose that he was in a state of happiness. To the dying thief he said, "This day shalt thou be with me in paradise." When Jesus died, he said, "It is finished"; and he doubtless meant by that that his sufferings and toils for man's redemption were at an end. All suppositions of any toils or pains after his death are fables, and without the slightest warrant in the New Testament.

Thine Holy One - The word in the Hebrew which is translated here "Holy One" properly denotes "One who is tenderly and piously devoted to another," and corresponds to the expression used in the New Testament, "my beloved Son." It is also used, as it is here by the Septuagint and by Peter, to denote "One that is holy, that is set apart to God." In this sense it is applied to Christ, either as being set apart to this office, or as so pure as to make it proper to designate him by way of eminence the Holy One, or the Holy One of God. It is several times used as the wellknown designation of the Messiah: Mark 1:24, "I know thee who thou art, the Holy One of God"; Luke 4:34; Acts 3:14, "But ye denied the Holy One, and the just," etc. See also Luke 1:35, "That holy thing that is born of thee shall be called the Son of God."

To see corruption - To see corruption is to experience it, to be made partakers of it. The Hebrews often expressed the idea of experiencing anything by the use of words pertaining to the senses, as, to taste of death, to see death, etc. Corruption here means putrefaction in the grave. The word which is used in the Psalm, שׁחת shachath, is thus used in Job 17:14, "I have said to corruption, thou art my father," etc. The Greek word used here properly denotes this. Thus, it is used in Acts 13:34-37. This meaning would be properly suggested by the Hebrew word, and thus the ancient versions understood it. The meaning implied in the expression is, that he of whom the Psalm was written should be restored to life again; and this meaning Peter proceeds to show that the words must have.

28

Acts 2:28

Open passage

简体中文

你已将……指示我 - 希伯来原文作“你必将指示我”等语。就弥赛亚而言,这话的意思是:你必使我复活。

生命的道路 - 这词的本意是指通往生命的道路;正如我们所说的升迁或尊荣之路、幸福之路、灭亡之路等。见 Proverbs 7:26-27。它的意思是:你必使我认识生命本身,也就是说,你必使我复活。诗篇中的这些话可以这样解释,而不至强解原意;既然前文各节论到弥赛亚的死与埋葬,那么本节自然且恰当的含义就是:他必重得生命。

你必叫我得着满足的快乐 - 这表达了弥赛亚在想到那将要显给他的恩典——从死里复活、升到神的右边——时的感受。圣经描述说,正是那摆在他面前的天上喜乐的盼望支持着他(Hebrews 12:2;Ephesians 1:20-22)。

因见你的面 - 字面意思是“在你的面上”,即在你的面前。“面”(countenance)与“临在”(presence)二词意思相同,都指“恩宠”,或指得以进到神面前的那份“尊荣与福乐”。弥赛亚所盼望的那尊荣,正是支持着他的力量。这也证明诗篇所论到的那一位,预期自己必从死里复活,并被高举到神面前。这盼望如今已经成全:弥赛亚如今在他被高举到宇宙宝座之际,满心喜乐。他已经“升到他的父、也是我们的父那里”;他“坐在神的右边”;他已进入那“摆在他面前的喜乐”;他“得了尊贵荣耀为冠冕”;“万物都服在他的脚下”。想到这里,我们可以留意:

(1) 弥赛亚对自己必从死里复活,怀有完全而确定的期望。主耶稣始终显明这一点,并常常向门徒宣告。

(2) 救主既因摆在前面的荣耀而喜乐,我们也当如此。我们当存着喜乐的心,期待永远住在神面前,期待与他同坐宝座的那尊荣——“正如我得了胜,在我父的宝座上与他同坐一般”。

(3) 这盼望也当在患难、灾祸与试炼中支持我们,正如它曾支持他一样。这些苦难不久就要结束;我们若是他的朋友,就必像他那样“得胜”,被接入上面的“满足的喜乐”,来到神的“右手”边——“在那里有永远的福乐”。

English original

Thou hast made known ... - The Hebrew is, "Thou wilt make known to me," etc. In relation to the Messiah, it means, Thou wilt restore me to life.

The ways of life - This properly means the path to life; as we say, the road to preferment or honor; the path to happiness; the highway to ruin, etc. See Proverbs 7:26-27. It means, thou wilt make known to me life itself, that is, thou wilt restore me to life. The expressions in the Psalm are capable of this interpretation without doing any violence to the text; and if the preceding verses refer to the death and burial of the Messiah, then the natural and proper meaning of this is, that he would be restored to life again.

Thou shalt make me full of joy - This expresses the feelings of the Messiah in view of the favor that would thus be showed him; the resurrection from the dead, and the elevation to the right hand of God. It was this which is represented as sustaining him the prospect of the joy that was before him, in heaven, Hebrews 12:2; Ephesians 1:20-22.

With thy countenance - Literally, "with thy face," that is, in thy presence. The words "countenance" and "presence" mean the same thing, and denote "favor," or the "honor and happiness" provided by being admitted to the presence of God. The prospect of the honor that would be bestowed on the Messiah was what sustained him. And this proves that the person contemplated in the Psalm expected to be raised from the dead, and exalted to the presence of God. That expectation is now fulfilled, and the Messiah is now filled with joy in his exaltation to the throne of the universe. He has "ascended to his Father and our Father"; he is "seated at the right hand of God"; he has entered on that "joy which was set before him"; he is "crowned with glory and honor"; and "all things are put under his feet." In view of this, we may remark:

(1) That the Messiah had full and confident expectation that he would rise from the dead. This the Lord Jesus always evinced, and often declared it to his disciples.

(2) if the Saviour rejoiced in view of the glories before him, we should also. We should anticipate with joy an everlasting dwelling in the presence of God, and the high honor of sitting "with him on his throne, as he overcame, and is set down with the Father on his throne."

(3) the prospect of this should sustain us, as it did him, in the midst of persecution, calamity, and trials. Thy will soon be ended; and if we are his friends, we shall "overcome," as he did, and be admitted to "the fulness of joy" above, and to the "right hand" of God, "where are pleasures forevermore."

29

Acts 2:29

Open passage

简体中文

弟兄们 - 彼得现在要证明,诗篇中的这段话不可能论到大卫,而必定是指弥赛亚。他以恭敬的态度开始论证,称他们为弟兄,尽管他们刚刚指控他和其余的人醉酒。无论基督徒从反对者那里遭遇怎样的轻蔑与羞辱,都当照常使用恭敬的称呼方式。

我可以明明地对你们说 - 意思是:“关于大卫,我可以放胆、公开地说话。”他固然是极其敬虔的人,固然被我们众人尊为君王,但论到他说他已经死了、已经归于朽坏,这也是合宜的。这是向他们所共同尊敬的君王表达崇高敬意的一种委婉方式,同时又显出查验一段圣经时的胆识——这段经文当时可能被许多人认为单单是指大卫说的。

先祖大卫 - “先祖”一词的本义是“家族的首领或家长”;进而指“家族的创立者,或杰出的祖先”。这称呼通常专门用于亚伯拉罕、以撒、雅各,即犹太民族杰出的创始者(Hebrews 7:4;Acts 7:8-9),也用于以色列各宗族的首领,即各支派的族长(1 Chronicles 24:31;2 Chronicles 19:8 等)。因此这是一个表示“崇高敬意”的尊称。用于大卫,意思是他就是那王家杰出的首领或创立者;这词表明彼得的用意:他固然要自由地查验一段被认为是指大卫的经文,却不愿对这样一位君王说任何不敬的话。

死了,而且埋葬了 - 这事实的记载就在旧约中。从来没有人声称他复活了,因此这诗篇不可能指他。

坟墓直到今日还在我们这里 - 就在耶路撒冷城中。坟墓通常位于城墙之外、村界以外。在城内安葬的习惯并不通行。这不独是希伯来人的情形,也是其他古民族的情形,至今在东方各国仍是如此,只有君王和极尊贵之人的遗骸才获准安息于城墙之内:1 Samuel 28:3:“撒母耳死了……以色列众人……葬他在拉玛,就是他本城里”;2 Kings 21:18:“玛拿西……葬在自己宫园的院内”;2 Chronicles 16:14,亚撒葬在大卫城里;2 Kings 14:20。大卫葬在大卫城里(1 Kings 2:10),与他的列祖同葬;就是在锡安山上,他在那里建造了一座以他名字命名的城(2 Samuel 5:7)。诸王坟墓的形制如何,并不能确知;然而几乎可以肯定,它们必是建造得十分宏伟。

坟墓通常是凿出来的石穴,或天然的洞穴;凿在整块磐石中、规模宏大的坟墓,已知确实存在。以下关于那座称为“列王墓”的坟墓的记述,节译自莫德雷尔(Maundrell):“入口是通过一条凿穿整块磐石的通道,进入一个约四十步见方的露天庭院,庭院是从岩石中凿下去的。南面有一个柱廊,长九步、宽四步,也是凿自整块磐石。柱廊尽头是通往坟墓的下行阶梯。阶梯下到一个约七八码见方的房间,凿自天然磐石。从这房间有通道通入另外六个房间,全都与第一间构造相同。除第一间外,每个房间里都有棺椁,安放在墓室壁上的壁龛中”等(莫德雷尔《游记》)。如果诸王的坟墓是这种形制,那么显然它们是耗费大量人工与钱财的工程。

此外,大概也像今日一样,为纪念那些逝去的伟人立有昂贵而华丽的纪念碑。以下摘自《圣地与圣书》的一段(转引自威廉斯 Williams 的《圣城》),可以说明坟墓的一般构造:“整个房间、壁龛与通道的体系,一看耶路撒冷附近‘士师墓’的平面图便能一目了然。入口朝西,有一个门厅,十三英尺乘九英尺。墓室几乎二十英尺见方,高八英尺。北面的立面见图2,显示上下两层壁龛,这在坟墓中不常见。下层有七个,每个长七英尺、宽二十英寸、高近三英尺。上层有三个拱形凹室,每个凹室有两个壁龛。从这个房间有门通向另两间墓室,各有自己的一套壁龛,即安放尸体的槽位,如平面图所示。我曾在拉塔基亚探查过数十座与耶路撒冷这座极为相似的坟墓;在我们这里西顿的平原上和山坡上,也有许多同一大形式的坟墓——室中有室,每室都有安放死者的壁龛,按各人所好或需要而作不同排列。”

这些坟墓在耶路撒冷西北约一英里处。“那通常称为‘列王墓’的坟墓,坐落在大马士革门以北约半英里的橄榄树林中,距通往纳布卢斯的大路东侧不远。庭院凿在整块磐石中,约九十英尺见方、深二十英尺。庭院西侧有一列柱廊,长三十九英尺、深十七英尺、高十五英尺。原先檐口上饰有葡萄、花环和花彩,做工精美;中央的柱子和角壁柱,看似哥林多式样。柱廊南端一扇很矮的门通入前室——十九英尺见方,高七八英尺。从这里有三条通道通入其他墓室,其中向南的两间各有五六个墓穴。西边墓室还有一条通道,往下走几级台阶,通入一个朝北的大地窖,里面有与边墙平行的墓穴。这些墓室全都凿在极坚硬的岩石中,入口原先用石门封闭,石门带镶板、装在石铰链上,如今都已破碎。整组坟墓显示出王家的手笔和经年的余裕,但出于谁、为谁而建,纯属猜测。我知道没有什么充分理由把它们归于阿迪亚波尼的海伦娜。多数旅行家和作者倾向于把它们看作哈斯摩尼王朝诸王的坟墓”(《圣地与圣书》卷2,487-488页)。大卫坟墓的位置如今已不得而知。

直到今日 - 大卫的坟墓为人熟知并受人敬重,这一点从约瑟夫斯(《犹太古史》卷7,第15章,第3节)可以清楚看出:“他(大卫)由他儿子所罗门葬在耶路撒冷,葬礼极尽隆盛,并伴有君王下葬惯有的一切丧仪。此外,还有巨量的财富与他同葬:一千三百年后,大祭司许尔堪被安提阿古围攻,想要给他钱财使他解围,便打开大卫坟墓的一个墓室,取出三千他连得。多年以后,希律又打开另一间墓室,取走了大量钱财”等。另见《犹太古史》卷13,第8章,第4节。像大卫这样一位君王的坟墓,必是众所周知、受人敬重的。因此,彼得可以满有把握地诉诸他们自己的信念与知识:大卫并没有从死里复活。没有一个犹太人这样相信或这样设想。众人既这样看顾他的坟墓,又这样尊敬他的墓地,就都相信他已归于朽坏。所以,这诗篇不可能指他。

English original

Men and brethren - This passage of the Psalms Peter now proves could not relate to David, but must have reference to the Messiah. He begins his argument in a respectful manner, addressing them as his brethren, though they had just charged him and the others with intoxication. Christians should use the usual respectful forms of salutation, whatever contempt and reproaches they may meet with from opposers.

Let me freely speak - That is, "It is lawful or proper to speak with boldness, or openly, respecting David." Though he was eminently a pious man, though venerated by us all as a king, yet it is proper to say of him that he is dead, and has returned to corruption. This was a delicate way of expressing high respect for the monarch whom they all honored, and yet evinced boldness in examining a passage of Scripture which probably many supposed to have reference solely to him.

Of the patriarch David - The word "patriarch" properly means "the head or ruler of a family"; and then "the founder of a family, or an illustrious ancestor." It was commonly applied to Abraham, Isaac, and Jacob by way of eminence, the illustrious founders of the Jewish nation, Hebrews 7:4; Acts 7:8-9. It was also applied to the heads of the families, or the chief men of the tribes of Israel, 1 Chronicles 24:31; 2 Chronicles 19:8, etc. It was thus a title of honor, denoting "high respect." Applied to David, it means that he was the illustrious head or founder of the royal family, and the word is expressive of Peter's intention not to say anything disrespectful of such a king, at the same time that he freely canvassed a passage of Scripture which had been supposed to refer to him.

Dead and buried - The record of that fact they had in the O d Testament. There had been no pretence that he had risen, and therefore the Psalm could not apply to him.

His sepulchre is with us - Is in the city of Jerusalem., Sepulchres wore commonly situated without the walls of cities and the limits of villages. The custom of burying in towns was not commonly practiced. This was true of other ancient nations as well as the Hebrews, and is still in Eastern countries, except in the case of kings and very distinguished men, whose ashes are permitted to rest within the walls of a city: 1 Samuel 28:3, "Samuel was dead ...and Israel ...buried him in Ramah, in his own city"; 2 Kings 21:18, "Manasseh ...was buried in the garden of his own house"; 2 Chronicles 16:14, Asa was buried in the city of David; 2 Kings 14:20. David was buried in the city of David 1 Kings 2:10, with his fathers; that is, on Mount Zion, where he built a city called after his name, 2 Samuel 5:7. Of what form the tombs of the kings were is not certainly known. It is almost certain, however, that they would be constructed in a magnificent manner.

The tombs were commonly excavations from rocks, or natural caves; and sepulchres cut out of the solid rock, of vast extent, are Known to have existed. The following account of the tomb called "the sepulchre of the kings" is abridged from Maundrell: "The approach is through an entrance cut out of a solid rock, which admits you into an open court about 40 paces square, cut down into the rock. On the south side is a portico nine paces long and four broad, hewn likewise out of the solid rock. At the end of the portico is the descent to the sepulchres. The descent is into a room about 7 or 8 yards square, cut out of the natural rock. From this room there are passages into six more, all of the same fabric with the first. In every one of these rooms, except the first, were coffins placed in niches in the sides of the chamber," etc. (Maundrell's Travels). If the tombs of the kings were of this form, it is clear that they were works of great labor and expense.

Probably, also, there were, as there are now, costly and splendid monuments erected to the memory of the mighty dead. The following extract from "The Land and the Book," and cut on the next page (from Williams' Holy City), will illustrate the usual construction of tombs: "The entire system of rooms, niches, and passages may be comprehended at once by an inspection of the plan of the Tombs of the Judges near Jerusalem. The entrance faces the west, and has a vestibule (a) 13 feet by 9. Chamber (B), nearly 20 feet square, and 8 high. The north side is seen in elevation in Fig. 2, and shows two tiers of niches, one over the other, not often met with in tombs. There are seven in the lower tier, each 7 feet long, 20 inches wide, and nearly 3 feet high. The upper tier has three arched recesses, and each recess has two niches. From this room (B) doors lead out into chambers (C and D), which have their own special system of niches, or Ioculi, for the reception of the bodies, as appears on the plan. I have explored scores of sepulchres at Ladakiyeh closely resembling this at Jerusalem, and there are many in the plain and on the hillsides above us here at Sidon of the same general form chambers within chambers, and each with niches for the dead, variously arranged according to taste or necessity."

These tombs are about a mile northwest of Jerusalem. "The tombs which are commonly called the 'Tombs of the Kings' are in an olivegrove about half a mile north of the Damascus Gate, and a few rods east of the great road to Nablus. A court is sunk in the solid rock about 90 feet square and 20 deep. On the west side of this court is a sort of portico, 39 feet long, 17 deep, and 15 high. It was originally ornamented with grapes, garlands, and festoons, beautifully done on the cornice; and the columns in the center, and the pilasters at the corners, appear to have resembled the Corinthian order. A very low door in the south end of the portico opens into the ante-chamber - 19 feet square, and 7 or 8 high. From this three passages conduct into other rooms, two of them, to the south, having five or six crypts. A passage also leads from the west room down several steps into a large vault running north, where are crypts parallel to the sides. These rooms are all cut in rock intensely hard, and the entrances were originally closed with stone doors, made with panels and hung on stone hinges, which are now all broken. The whole series of tombs indicates the hand of royalty and the leisure of years, but by whom and for whom they were made is a mere matter of conjecture. I know no good reason for ascribing them to Helena of Adiabene. Most travelers and writers are inclined to make them the sepulchres of the Asmonean kings" (The Land and the Book, vol. 2, pp. 487, 488). The site of the tomb of David is no longer known.

Unto this day - That the sepulchre of David was well known and honored is clear from Josephus (Antiq., book 7, chapter 15, section 3): "He (David) was buried by his son Solomon in Jerusalem with great magnificence, and with all the other funeral pomps with which kings used to be buried. Moreover, he had immense wealth buried with him: for one thousand and three hundred years afterward Hyrcanus the high priest, when he was besieged by Antiochus, and was desirous of giving him money to raise the siege, opened one room of David's sepulchre and took out three thousand talents. Herod, many years afterward, opened another room, and took away a great deal of money," etc. See also Antiq., book 13, chapter 8, section 4. The tomb of a monarch like David would be well known and had in reverence. Peter might, then, confidently appeal to their own belief and knowledge that David had not been raised from the dead. No Jew believed or supposed it. All, by their care of his sepulchre, and by the honor with which they regarded his grave, believed that he had returned to corruption. The Psalm, therefore, could not apply to him.

30

Acts 2:30

Open passage

简体中文

故此 - 大卫既已死了、埋葬了,显然他在这段不寻常的宣告中不可能指着自己说。于是可知他必定是指着另一位说的。

既是先知 - 就是预先说未来之事的人。大卫受默示,这是清楚的(2 Samuel 23:2)。许多关于弥赛亚的预言都见于大卫的诗篇:诗篇 22:1,比较 Matthew 27:46;Luke 24:44——Psalm 22:18,比较 Matthew 27:35——Psalm 69:21,比较 Matthew 27:34;Matthew 27:48——Psalm 69:25,比较 Acts 1:20。

又预先看明 - 即因神对他后裔所说的话而知道。

用誓言向他起誓 - 论到神向大卫起誓的经文,见于 Psalm 89:3-4:“我与我所拣选的人立了约,向我的仆人大卫起了誓:我要建立你的后裔”等;以及 Psalm 132:11:“耶和华向大卫、凭诚实起了誓,必不反复,说:我要使你所生的坐在你的宝座上”;另见 Psalm 89:35-36。这一切经文所指的应许,记在 2 Samuel 7:11-16。

从他的后裔中 - 即从他的子孙中。见 2 Samuel 7:12;Genesis 35:11;Genesis 46:26;1 Kings 8:19 等。

按肉体说 - 就是说,就弥赛亚的人性而言,他将出于大卫的后裔。这样的表述非常值得注意。弥赛亚若仅仅是一个人,这些话就毫无意义。这样的话从不用在纯粹的人身上;这意味着说话者或作者认为,弥赛亚另有一本性,是不属肉体的。见 Romans 1:3-4。

要立基督坐在他的宝座上 - 基督就是弥赛亚。“使后裔兴起”,即把这后裔赐给他。这一切经文里给大卫的应许,直接的指向是所罗门和他的后裔。但新约作者显然把它们理解为也指着弥赛亚。同样清楚的是,犹太人也知道弥赛亚必出于大卫的后裔(Matthew 12:23;Matthew 21:9;Matthew 22:42;Matthew 22:45;Mark 11:10;John 7:42 等)。这些给大卫的应许是经过怎样的途径被理解为适用于弥赛亚的,也许不易断定;但事实是清楚的。以下几点说明或可照亮这问题:

(a) 应许给大卫的国没有终局;它要永远坚立。然而他的后裔死了,别的一切国度也都改变了。

(b) 这应许也是独一无二的;它没有赐给犹太任何别的君王;对周围列国列王也没有类似的宣告。因此,它逐渐被应用到那位将来之王与将来之国身上,那就是全民的盼望;他们的眼睛焦灼地注视着那久所期待的弥赛亚。

(c) 到他来的时候,弥赛亚必出于大卫的后裔、他的国必存到永远,已成为犹太人确立的教义。

使徒们正是根据犹太人对这预言的信念来论证;犹太人的这些看法,为使徒提供了一个有力的据点,使他们能叫人信服耶稣就是弥赛亚。彼得肯定大卫知道这一点,也肯定他这样理解这应许:不仅指所罗门,更在远为重要的意义上指弥赛亚。幸好我们有大卫自己的注释,表达了他本人对那应许的看法。这注释特别见于 Psalm 2:1-12;Psalm 22;Psalm 69;和 Psalm 16:1-11。在这些诗篇中,大卫仰望弥赛亚的来临,这是无可置疑的;他视那赐给他的应许一直延伸到弥赛亚的来临与作王,也同样无可置疑。

可以留意,关于这一节,抄本中有一些重要的异文。“按肉体说”这一表达在许多抄本中都没有,如今 Griesbach 在他的希腊文新约中也把它删去了。古叙利亚译本、埃塞俄比亚译本和拉丁文武加大译本也都略去它。

坐在他的宝座上 - 就是在他的国里作他的继承者。扫罗是以色列头一位君王。国度从他和他后裔手中被夺去,赐给了大卫和他的后裔,又定意这国要永远留在大卫家中,不再离开他的家,像离开扫罗家那样。大卫作王的独特之处,即他与地上别王不同之处,在于他是治理神百姓的王。以色列是他拣选的民,国度就是治理那民。因此,凡治理神百姓的——尽管方式与大卫略有不同——就算为坐在他的宝座上、作他的继承者。治理的形式可以改变,但它主要的特征不变,仍是治理神百姓的王权。在这个意义上,弥赛亚坐在大卫的宝座上。他是大卫的后裔和继承者。他统管至高者的一切朋友。这国既注定要充满全地、在天上存到永远,就可以说它是一个永无穷尽的国。它是属灵的,却不因此更不真实;它不用血气的兵器护卫,却照样真实地受护卫;它不靠刀剑与战争的喧嚣前进,却照样真实地对抗执政的、掌权的、和天空属灵气的恶魔而前进;它没有看得见的元首和地上的君王,却照样真实地在救恩的元帅、万王之王之下。

English original

Therefore - As David was dead and buried, it was clear that he could not have referred to himself in this remarkable declaration. It followed that he must have had reference to some other one.

Being a prophet - One who foretold future events. That David was inspired is clear, 2 Samuel 23:2. Many of the prophecies relating to the Messiah are found in the Psalms of David: Psalm 22:1, compare Matthew 27:46; Luke 24:44 - Psalm 22:18, compare Matthew 27:35 - Psalm 69:21, compare Matthew 27:34, Matthew 27:48 - Psalm 69:25, compare Acts 1:20.

And knowing - Knowing by what God had said to him respecting his posterity.

Had sworn with an oath - The places which speak of God as having sworn to David are found in Psalm 89:3-4, "I have made a covenant with my chosen, I have sworn unto David my servant, Thy seed will I establish," etc.; and Psalm 132:11, "The Lord hath sworn in truth unto David, he will not turn from it, Of the fruit of thy body will I set upon my throne"; Psalm 89:35-36. The promise to which reference is made in all these places is in 2 Samuel 7:11-16.

Of the fruit of his loins - Of his descendants. See 2 Samuel 7:12; Genesis 35:11; Genesis 46:26; 1 Kings 8:19, etc.

According to the flesh - That is, so far as the human nature of the Messiah was concerned, he would be descended from David. Expressions like these are very remarkable. If the Messiah was only a man, they would be unmeaning. They are never used in relation to a mere man; and they imply that the speaker or writer supposed that there pertained to the Messiah a nature which was not according to the flesh. See Romans 1:3-4.

He would raise up Christ - That is, the Messiah. To raise up seed, or descendants, is to give them to him. The promises made to David in all these places had immediate reference to Solomon and to his descendants. But it is clear that the New Testament writers understood them as referring also to the Messiah. And it is no less clear that the Jews understood that the Messiah was to be descended from David, Matthew 12:23; Matthew 21:9; Matthew 22:42, Matthew 22:45; Mark 11:10; John 7:42, etc. In what way these promises that were made to David were understood as applying to the Messiah, it may not be easy to determine. The fact, however, is clear. The following remarks may throw some light on the subject:

(a) The kingdom which was promised to David was to have no end; it was to be established forever. Yet his descendants died, and all other kingdoms changed.

(b) The promise likewise stood by itself; it was not made to any other of the Jewish kings; nor were similar declarations made of surrounding kingdoms and nations. It came, therefore, gradually to be applied to that future king and kingdom which was the hope of the nation; and their eyes were anxiously fixed on the long-expected Messiah.

(c) At the time that he came it had become the settled doctrine of the Jews that he was to descend from David, and that his kingdom was to be perpetual.

On this belief of the prophecy the apostles argued; and the opinions of the Jews furnished a strong point by which they could convince them that Jesus was the Messiah. Peter affirms that David was aware of this, and that he so understood the promise as referring not only to Solomon, but in a far more important sense to the Messiah. Happily we have a commentary of David himself as expressing his own views of that promise. That commentary is found particularly in Psalm 2:1-12; Psalm 22; Psalm 69; and Psalm 16:1-11; In these Psalms there can be no doubt that David looked forward to the coming of the Messiah; and there can be as little that he regarded the promise made to him as extending to his coming and his reign.

It may be remarked that there are some important variations in the manuscripts in regard to this verse. The expression "according to the flesh" is omitted in many mss., and is now left out by Griesbach in his New Testament. It is omitted also by the ancient Syriac and Ethiopic versions, and by the Latin Vulgate.

To sit on his throne - To be his successor in his kingdom. Saul was the first of the kings of Israel. The kingdom was taken away from him and his posterity, and conferred on David and his descendants. It was determined that it should be continued in the family of David, and no more go out of his family, as it had from the family of Saul. The unique characteristic of David as king, or what distinguished him from the other kings of the earth, was that he reigned over the people of God. Israel was his chosen people, and the kingdom was over that nation. Hence, he that should reign over the people of God, though in a manner somewhat different from David, would be regarded as occupying his throne, and as being his successor. The form of the administration might be varied, but it would still retain its prime characteristic as being a reign over the people of God. In this sense the Messiah sits on the throne of David. He is his descendant and successor. He has an empire over all the friends of the Most High. And as that kingdom is destined to fill the earth, and to be eternal in the heavens, so it may be said that it is a kingdom which shall have no end. It is spiritual, but not the less real; defended not with carnal weapons, but not the less really defended; advanced not by the sword and the din of arms, but not the less really advanced against principalities, and powers, and spiritual wickedness in high places; not under a visible head and earthly monarch, but not less really under the Captain of salvation and the King of kings.

31

Acts 2:31

Open passage

简体中文

就预先看明这事…… - 是借着预言之灵看见的。由此可见,大卫对于有关弥赛亚的重大教义,有清楚的看见。

讲论…… - 见 Psalm 16:1-11。

他的灵魂…… - 见 Acts 2:27 的注释。

English original

He, seeing this before ... - By the spirit of prophecy. From this it appears that David had distinct views of the great doctrines pertaining to the Messiah.

Spake ... - See Psalm 16:1-11.

That his soul ... - See the notes on Acts 2:27.

32

Acts 2:32

Open passage

简体中文

这耶稣 - 彼得既已指明圣经预言弥赛亚必要复活,现在便断言:这样的事在耶稣身上确实发生了。这若是预言的事,对这教义真实性的反对便都消除了,剩下的问题只是有没有证据表明这事已经成就。彼得现在就提出这证据,并以他自己的见证和他弟兄们的见证,来证实这重大而荣耀的事实。

我们都为这事作见证 - 彼得在这里所指的,大概是在场的全数一百二十人;他们都随时准备以任何方式作证。所要证明的事,就是耶稣被处死之后,有人看见他活着。使徒们正是奉派为此作见证的。保罗告诉我们(1 Corinthians 15:6),他一次曾显现给五百多弟兄,就是基督徒,看。这次聚集的一百二十人,无疑也是其中的一部分,并且随时准备为此作证。这就是彼得提出的证明;这证明的力量,过去和现在都应当是完全无可抗拒的:

(1) 他们亲眼看见了他。他们不是凭推测,也不是凭推理,而是拥有世人天天赖以行事、并且必须视为令人满意的证据——他们自己感官的证据。

(2) 人数如此之多,不可能受蒙蔽。若一百二十人不能证明一件简明的事实,那么任何事都无法凭见证确立,也就没有任何查明事实的途径了。

(3) 所要确立的是一件简明的事。不是他们“看见他复活”——那是他们从未声称的;骗子才会那样说。而是他们看见了他,在他被钉十字架之后,与他说话、同行、同吃、同喝,而他乃是活着的。他已死的事实载于犹太人的记录,没有人提出质疑。基督教所要证实的唯一事实,就是他此后被人看见是活的,而这有许多见证人作证。

(4) 他们在这事上没有任何欺骗世界的利害关系。这样做没有任何得享乐、财富或尊荣的指望。

(5) 他们此刻表明,甘愿为证实这件事的真实忍受任何苦难,甚至舍命。

English original

This Jesus - Peter, having shown that it was predicted that the Messiah would rise, now affirms that such a resurrection occurred in the case of Jesus. If it was a matter of prophecy, all objection to the truth of the doctrine was taken away, and the only question was whether there was evidence that this had been done. The proof of this Peter now alleges, and offers his own testimony, and that of his brethren, to the truth of this great and glorious fact.

We are all witnesses - It seems probable that Peter refers here to the whole 120 who were present, and who were ready to attest it in any manner. The matter which was to be proved was that Jesus was seen alive after he had been put to death. The apostles were appointed to bear witness of this. We are told by Paul 1 Corinthians 15:6 that he was seen by more than five hundred brethren, that is, Christians, at one time. The 120 assembled on this occasion were doubtless part of the number, and were ready to attest this. This was the proof that Peter alleged; and the strength of this proof was, and should have been, perfectly irresistible:

(1) They had seen him themselves. They did not conjecture it or reason about it; but they had the evidence on which people act every day, and which must be regarded as satisfactory the evidence of their own senses.

(2) the number was such they could not be imposed on. If 120 persons could not prove a plain matter of fact, nothing could be established by testimony; there could be no way of arriving at any facts.

(3) the thing to be established was a plain matter. It was not that they "saw him rise." That they never pretended: Impostors would have done this. But it was that they saw him, talked, walked, ate, drank with him, being alive, after, he had been crucified. The fact of his death was matter of Jewish record, and no one called it in question. The only fact for Christianity to make out was that he was seen alive afterward, and this was attested by many witnesses.

(4) they had no interest in deceiving the world in this thing. There was no prospect of pleasure, wealth, or honor in doing it.

(5) they offered themselves now as ready to endure any sufferings, or to die, in attestation of the truth of this event.

33

Acts 2:33

Open passage

简体中文

他既被神的右手高举 - 在希伯来人中,"右手"常用来表示"权能";因此这里的说法不是指他被高举到神的右边,而是指借着他的大能。他借着神的大能从死人中复活,胜过他的一切仇敌,凯旋升天。圣经中用"右手"表示"权能"的用法很常见:Job 40:14:"我就承认你右手能以救自己";Psalm 17:7:"你那用右手拯救投靠你的";Psalm 18:35;Psalm 20:6;Psalm 21:8;Psalm 44:3;Psalm 60:5 等。

被高举 - 指他在天上被立为王、为弥赛亚。他从降卑的境况被提升到创世以前他与父同享的荣耀,John 17:5。

又从父受了…… - 圣灵在他受死以先就已应许给门徒,John 14:26;John 15:26;John 16:13-15。圣经明确宣告:(1) 主耶稣若不回到天上,圣灵就不会赐下,John 16:7;(2) 这恩赐在于父的权柄,父要差他来,John 14:26;John 15:26。这应许如今已经应验,凡目睹他们眼前这非凡景象的人,都不能不承认这是神圣大能的作为。

把……浇灌下来 - 指说各种语言、宣告福音真理的这种能力。彼得正是以此解释他们眼前这非同寻常的事件。所发生的事不可能出于新酒,Acts 2:15。这是早已明确预言的,Acts 2:16-21。耶稣要复活,这也是预言过的,Acts 2:22-31。使徒们见证他已经复活,并且他曾应许圣灵要降下来;而这应验的应许,正是解释眼前景象的合理途径。这是无可辩驳的;它对目睹之人所产生的影响,也正是可以预期的。

English original

Therefore, being by the right hand - The right hand among the Hebrews was often used to denote "power"; and the expression here means, not that he was exalted to the right hand of God. but by his power. He was raised from the dead by his power, and borne to heaven, triumphant over all his enemies. The use of the word "right hand" to denote "power" is common in the Scriptures: Job 40:14, "Thine own right hand can save thee"; Psalm 17:7, "Thou savest by thy right hand them that trust in thee"; Psalm 18:35; Psalm 20:6; Psalm 21:8; Psalm 44:3; Psalm 60:5, etc.

Exalted - Constituted King and Messiah in heaven. Raised up from his condition of humiliation to the glory which he had with the Father before the world was, John 17:5.

And having received ... - The Holy Spirit was promised to the disciples before his death, John 14:26; John 15:26; John 16:13-15. It was expressly declared:

(1) That the Holy Spirit would not be given except the Lord Jesus should return to heaven John 16:7; and,

(2) That this gift was in the power of the Father, and that he would send him, John 14:26; John 15:26. This promise was now fulfilled, and those who witnessed the extraordinary scene before them could not doubt that it was the effect of divine power.

Hath shed forth this ... - This power of speaking different languages and declaring the truth of the gospel. In this way Peter accounts for the remarkable events before them. What had occurred could not be produced by new wine, Acts 2:15. It was expressly foretold, Acts 2:16-21. It was predicted that Jesus would rise, Acts 2:22-31. The apostles were witnesses that he had risen, and that he had promised that the Holy Spirit would descend; and the fulfillment of this promise was a rational way of accounting for the scene before them. It was unanswerable; and the effect on those who witnessed it was such as might be expected.

34

Acts 2:34

Open passage

简体中文

大卫并没有升到天上 - 意即大卫并没有从死人中复活升天。这进一步表明,Psalm 16:1-11 不可能指大卫,而必定是指弥赛亚。无论他们何等尊崇大卫,何等惯于把圣经中这些话应用在他身上,这些话却不能应用在他身上。它们必定是指着另一位说的;彼得如今要引的正是那样一段经文。表明这些话不能应用在大卫身上,同时又表明大卫亲自为弥赛亚崇高的位格与尊荣作证,这是极为重要的。因此,彼得在这里引大卫本人作证,肯定弥赛亚必被升高到远超他自己的尊荣。这并不是断言大卫没有得救,也不是说他的灵魂没有升到天上,而是说,就彼得论弥赛亚所说的意义而言,大卫并没有在高天之上被高举。

但自己说 - Psalm 110:1。

主 - 圣经中“主”一词以小型大写字母排印时,表示原文的词是 יהוה Yahweh。希伯来人视之为神独有的名字,是不能传给任何别的存在的一个名字。在圣经中,这名字只应用于神。犹太人对此名极为敬畏,从不发音;每当它在圣经中出现,他们就改读另一个名字 אדני ̀Adonaay。这里的意思是:“耶和华说”等。

我主 - 在希伯来文里,这是另一个词——即 אדני ̀Adonaay。它本来是仆人对主人、或臣民对君王所用的话,或是地位低的人对尊贵的人表示尊敬的称呼。这里的意思是:“耶和华对我——大卫——所承认高于自己、为自己主宰的那一位说。”这样,大卫虽然按肉体认他为后裔,却也认他为高于自己的主。我们的救主曾引这节经文使法利赛人哑口无言,Matthew 22:42-46。这诗篇中的这段话是指着弥赛亚说的,这是清楚的。我们的救主在 Matthew 22:42 明确地这样应用,并且是以显明这是犹太人所共知的道理的方式应用的。参见 Matthew 22:42 等处的注释。

English original

For David is not ascended into the heavens - That is, David has not risen from the dead and ascended to heaven. This further shows that Psalm 16:1-11 could not refer to David, but must refer to the Messiah. Great as they esteemed David, and much as they were accustomed to apply these expressions of the Scripture to him, yet they could not be applicable to him. They must refer to some other being; and especially that passage which Peter now proceeds to quote. It was of great importance to show that these expressions could not apply to David, and also that David bore testimony to the exalted character and dignity of the Messiah. Hence, Peter here adduces David himself as affirming that the Messiah was to be exalted to a dignity far above his own. This does not affirm that David was not saved, or that his spirit had not ascended to heaven, but that he had not been exalted in the heavens in the sense in which Peter was speaking of the Messiah.

But he saith himself - Psalm 110:1.

The Lord - The small capitals used in translating the word "Lord" in the Bible denote that the original word is יהוה Yahweh. The Hebrews regarded this as the unique name of God, a name incommunicable to any other being. It is not applied to any being but God in the Scriptures. The Jews had such a reverence for it that they never pronounced it; but when it occurred in the Scriptures they pronounced another name, אדני ̀Adonaay. Here it means, "Yahweh said," etc.

My Lord - This is a different word in the Hebrew - it is אדני ̀Adonaay. It properly is applied by a servant to his master, or a subject to his sovereign, or is used as a title of respect by an inferior to a superior. It means here, "Yahweh said to him whom I, David, acknowledge to be my superior and sovereign." Thus, though he regarded him as his descendant according to the flesh, yet he regarded him also as his superior and Lord. By reference to this passage our Saviour confounded the Pharisees, Matthew 22:42-46. That the passage in this Psalm refers to the Messiah is clear. Our Saviour, in Matthew 22:42, expressly applied it thus, and in such a manner as to show that this was the well-understood doctrine of the Jews. See the notes on Matthew 22:42, etc.

35

Untitled

Open passage

简体中文

English original

36

Acts 2:36

Open passage

简体中文

故此,当叫一切都确实知道…… - “愿众人都因预言、我们的见证和五旬节那日所显的奇异景象而信服,确知真弥赛亚已经来到,并已被高举到天上。”

以色列全家 - “家”这词常指“家族”:“当叫以色列的全家,即犹太全国,都知道这事。”

当确实地知道 - 即要确信,或毫无犹豫、毫无错误可能地知道。这是他论证或讲道的总结。他已确立了他要证明的各点,如今把它应用于听众。

神已经立 - 即神已任命或设立。参见 Acts 5:31。

这位耶稣 - 指那位曾受苦的本人。他带着同样的身体复活,有同样的灵魂;他是同一位存有,与所有其他人有别。照样,基督徒复活时,也将是他们死前同样的存有。

你们钉在十字架上的 - 参见 Acts 2:23。要向他们显明行这事的罪咎,再没有比彼得所用的论证更合适的了。他向他们表明,神已差他作弥赛亚,并借叫他从死里复活显明了对他的爱。他们竟把神的儿子、他们民族的盼望置于死地。他不是骗子,不是散布动乱的人,不是亵渎神的人,而是神的弥赛亚;他们却把自己的手浸在他的血中。要使罪人惧怕战兢,再没有比向他们指明——拒绝基督就是拒绝神,不肯事奉他就是不肯事奉神——更合适的了。罪人的罪有双重的恶性:既是得罪那仁爱可亲的救主,又是得罪那爱他、立他拯救人的神。比较 Acts 3:14-15。

为主 - “主”一词本义指“所有者、主人或君王”。这里显然是说,神已高举他作久所期待的君王,并赐他在天上的统治权,或如我们所说的,立他为万有的统治者。这统治权的范围可从 John 17:2;Ephesians 1:21 等处看出。他在这职分中,如今统管天上地下,将来还要来审判世界。这真理特别适于激起他们的惧怕。他们杀害了他们的君王,如今这君王显为已从死里复活、受托无限权能的主。因此,他们有理由惧怕他要出来报仇,惩罚他们的罪。罪人抵挡救主,就是与自己那活着大能的君王和主争战。他有一切权柄,与活人死人的审判者相争是不安全的。

为基督 - 即弥赛亚。他们就这样把他们民族的盼望钉了十字架;把自己的手浸在那众先知所仰望之主的血中;把那位圣者置于死地——他那将临的盼望,曾扶持世上最圣洁的人度过苦难,在他们展望将来之年时安慰他们。他们列祖的盼望已经来到,他们却把他杀了;怪不得这事实的意识——罪咎、羞耻和混乱之感——笼罩他们的心,使他们痛楚地问道,他们当怎样行。

English original

Therefore let all ... - "Convinced by the prophecies, by our testimony, and by the remarkable scenes exhibited on the day of Pentecost, let all be convinced that the true Messiah has come and has been exalted to heaven."

House of Israel - The word "house" often means "family": "let all the family of Israel, that is, all the nation of the Jews, know this."

Know assuredly - Be assured, or know without any hesitation or possibility of mistake. This is the sum of his argument or his discourse. He had established the points which he purposed to prove, and he now applies it to his hearers.

God hath made - God hath appointed or constituted. See Acts 5:31.

That same Jesus - The very person who had suffered. He was raised with the same body, and had the same soul; he was the same being, as distinguished from all others. So Christians, in the resurrection, will be the same beings that they were before they died.

Whom ye have crucified - See Acts 2:23. There was nothing better suited to show them the guilt of having done this than the argument which Peter used. He showed them that God had sent him as the Messiah, and that he had showed his love for him in raising him from the dead. The Son of God, and the hope of their nation, they had put to death. He was not an impostor, nor a man sowing sedition, nor a blasphemer, but the Messiah of God; and they had imbrued their hands in his blood. There is nothing better suited to make sinners fear and tremble than to show them that, in rejecting Christ, they have rejected God; in refusing to serve him they have refused to serve God. The crime of sinners has a double malignity, as committed against a kind and lovely Saviour, and against the God who loved him, and appointed him to save people. Compare Acts 3:14-15.

Both Lord - The word "lord" properly denotes "proprietor, master, or sovereign." Here it means clearly that God had exalted him to be the king so long expected; and that he had given him dominion in the heavens, or, as we should say, made him ruler of all things. The extent of this dominion may be seen in John 17:2; Ephesians 1:21, etc. In the exercise of this orifice, he now rules in heaven and on earth, and will yet come to judge the world. This truth was particularly suited to excite their fear. They had murdered their sovereign, now shown to be raised from the dead, and entrusted with infinite power. They had reason, therefore, to fear that he would come forth in vengeance, and punish them for their crimes. Sinners, in opposing the Saviour, are at war with their living and mighty sovereign and Lord. He has all power, and it is not safe to contend against the judge of the living and the dead.

And Christ - Messiah. They had thus crucified the hope of their nation; imbrued their hands in the blood of him to whom the prophets had looked; and put to death that Holy One, the prospect of whose coming had sustained the most holy men of the world in affliction, and cheered them when they looked on to future years. He who was the hope of their fathers had come, and they had put him to death; and it is no wonder that the consciousness of this - that a sense of guilt, and shame, and confusion should overwhelm their minds, and lead them to ask, in deep distress, what they should do.

37

Acts 2:37

Open passage

简体中文

众人听见这话 - 即他们听见彼得这一宣告,以及耶稣是弥赛亚的这一证明。他的讲道中没有狂热;这是一场冷静、缜密而犀利的论证。他向他们证明了他所说之事的真实性,从而为这一果效预备了道路。

觉得扎心 - 译作“扎”的词 κατενύγησαν katenugēsan,在新约别处并未使用。它本义是“用针、柳叶刀或尖锐器具刺透、穿透”,继而指“被忧伤或任何一种剧烈的痛苦刺透”。它与我们的“痛悔”(compunction)一词恰好对应,并且同时含有骤然与剧烈之悲恸的意思。在这里,它的意思是:他们因彼得所说的话,突然且深切地被痛苦与惊惧所抓住。他们忧愁的缘由可能有以下几种:

(1)弥赛亚竟被自己的同胞置于死地,他们为此悲伤。

(2)他们深觉自己在此事上的罪责。其中掺杂着对忘恩负义的回忆,以及一种意识——他们犯了最加重、最可怖的谋杀罪,就是杀了他们自己的弥赛亚。

(3)惧怕他的忿怒。他仍然活着;已被高举为他们的主;并受托掌管一切的权能。他们害怕他的报复;他们知道自己罪有应得;并且认为自己正暴露在这忿怒之下。

(4)他们所行的事已无法挽回。罪责仍然存留;他们无法将其洗除。他们使自己的手沾了无辜之人的血,那罪责压住了他们的心灵。这表达了罪人被罪醒悟时通常有的感受。

弟兄们 - 这是一个表明恳切之爱的表达。就在此之前,他们还讥诮门徒,指控他们被新酒灌满了,Acts 2:13。如今他们却以敬重和信任对待他们。当罪人知罪的时候,他们对基督徒与基督教传道人的看法便大大改变。在此之前,他们或许讥笑并反对他们;那时,他们乐于受教于最卑微的基督徒,甚至紧抓住一位福音的传道人,仿佛他能凭自己的能力拯救他们。

我们当怎样行 - 即我们当怎样行,才能躲避这位被钉十字架、又被高举的弥赛亚的忿怒?他们惧怕他的报复,想知道如何逃避。再没有比这更重要的问题被提出过。这是一切知罪的罪人所发的问题。它含着对危险的意识、对罪责的感觉,以及照神的要求“降服己意”的准备。这也是保罗在 Acts 9:6 所问的同一个问题:“主啊,我当做什么?”以及禁卒在 Acts 16:30 所问的:“他……战战兢兢地……说,二位先生,我当怎样行才可以得救?”在这种情形——即知罪之罪人的情形——中,心境包含以下几方面:

(1)深感已往生活的邪恶;也许记起先前已被遗忘的千百件罪;一种弥漫而加深的信念,认定自己的心、言语与生活都是邪恶的,当受定罪。

(2)对神之公义的畏惧;当心思向上仰望神,或前瞻死亡与审判之日时所生的惊惧。

(3)渴望脱离这定罪之感与对将来的畏惧,这渴望有时强烈到近乎痛苦。

(4)愿意为神的旨意牺牲一切;交出心中支配性的志向,行他所要求的事。灵魂在这种状态中,便预备好接受永生的提议;罪人一旦到了这地步,怜悯的提议便正合他的处境,他便将自己交托给主耶稣,从而寻得平安。

关于彼得的这篇讲道和这非凡的结果,我们可以观察到:

(1)这是基督升天之后所传的第一篇讲道,是宗教传道人当效法的模范。

(2)这是一场清晰而缜密的论证。其中没有叫嚣,没有雄辩式的抨击,只有以清楚而醒目的方式陈明的真理。它充满了对其要点的证明,并且假定听众是有理性的人,是能够被真理感动的人。传道人无权把人当作没有理性与思想的人来对待,也无权因自己讲的是宗教主题,便以为自己可以随意讲说无稽之谈。

(3)这些人虽是罪大恶极的罪人,在杀害弥赛亚的罪上又添了讥诮圣灵与福音传道人的罪,彼得却冷静地与他们讲理,努力使他们确知自己的罪责。人应当被当作具有理性、能够看见宗教伟大真理之力与美的人来对待。

(4)彼得的论证正适合在他们的心中产生这种效果,使他们深深感到自己的罪责。他向他们证明,他们犯了杀害弥赛亚的罪;神已经叫他复活;而他们此刻正处于确立他所说之事真实性的一个有力证据的场景之中。没有任何一类真理,比这些真理更适合使他们对自己的罪责留下印象。

(5)知罪是罪人心中一个理性的过程。它是观看已往诸罪所产生的正当状态。它是容让真理留下恰当的印象,容让心灵按其当有的感受去感受。有罪的人应当愿意看见并承认自己的罪。承认错误,或在我们知道自己有罪时深深痛悔,并不是羞耻。羞耻在于掩饰罪行的伪饰欲望,在于不肯承认的骄傲,在于否认罪行的虚假。感受它并承认它,乃是坦白而真诚之心灵的标志。

(6)这些同样的真理,如今仍然适于使人知罪。罪人对待弥赛亚的方式,理当引起悲伤与惊惧。他没有杀害他,却弃绝了他;他没有给他戴上荆棘冠冕,却藐视了他;他没有在他悬挂十字架时侮辱他,此后却千百次地侮辱了他;他没有用枪刺他的肋旁,却因弃绝他、轻看他的怜悯而刺透了他的心。“为这些事,他当哭泣。”在救主的复活上,他也有极深的利害关系。救主复活,是我们也能复活的凭据;罪人展望前路时,当记得自己必须面对那位已经升天的神之子。救主作王;他活着,是万有的主。罪人现今的行为,正指向他的宝座、他的心、他的冠冕。他的一切罪行,他的君王都看见;在宝座上讥诮神的儿子,或轻视那位即将来审判的,都不是安全的事。罪人感受到这些真理时,就当战兢呼喊:我当怎样行?

(7)我们在此看见圣灵如何使人知罪。不是以任意的方式,而是依照真理、借着真理。我们也没有权利期待,真理若不呈现于人心,圣灵仍会使人知罪、归正。凡愿福音成功的人,应当陈明清楚、醒目、感人的真理,因为神惯于赐福的,正是这样的真理。

(8)在彼得与众使徒的行止上,我们看见福音能力的一个显著实例。就在不久之前,彼得还浑身战兢、心怀惧怕,起誓不认他的主人;如今,在杀害神之子的凶手面前,他大胆指控他们的罪行,并敢于面对他们的愤怒。就在不久之前,众门徒还都离弃主耶稣逃走了;如今,在他刚刚被控告并被处死的那座城里,在他的凶手面前,他们扬声宣告他们的罪与危险。除了神的大能,还有什么能产生这样的改变?一种能产生这般改变的宗教乃是从天上来的,这里岂不正是这方面的证据吗?

English original

Now when they heard this - When they heard this declaration of Peter, and this proof that Jesus was the Messiah. There was no fanaticism in his discourse; it was cool, close, pungent reasoning. He proved to them the truth of what he was saying, and thus prepared the way for this effect.

They were pricked in their heart - The word translated were "pricked," κατενύγησαν katenugēsan, is not used elsewhere in the New Testament. It properly denotes "to pierce or penetrate with a needle, lancet, or sharp instrument"; and then "to pierce with grief, or acute pain of any kind." It corresponds precisely to our word "compunction." It implies also the idea of sudden as well as acute grief. In this case it means that they were suddenly and deeply affected with anguish and alarm at what Peter had said. The causes of their grief may have been these:

(1) Their sorrow that the Messiah had been put to death by his own countrymen.

(2) their deep sense of guilt in having done this. There would be mingled here a remembrance of ingratitude, and a consciousness that they had been guilty of murder of the most aggravated and horrid kind, that of having killed their own Messiah.

(3) the fear of his wrath. He was still alive; exalted to be theft Lord; and entrusted with all power. They were afraid of his vengeance; they were conscious that they deserved it; and they supposed that they were exposed to it.

(4) what they had done could not be undone. The guilt remained; they could not wash it out. They had imbrued theft hands in the blood of innocence, and the guilt of that oppressed their souls. This expresses the usual feelings which sinners have when they are convicted of sin.

Men and brethren - This was an expression denoting affectionate earnestness. Just before this they mocked the disciples, and charged them with being filled with new wine, Acts 2:13. They now treated them with respect and confidence. The views which sinners have of Christians and Christian ministers are greatly changed when they are under conviction for sin. Before that they may deride and oppose them; then, they are glad to be taught by the obscurest Christian, and even cling to a minister of the gospel as if he could save them by his own power.

What shall we do? - What shall we do to avoid the wrath of this crucified and exalted Messiah? They were apprehensive of his vengeance, and they wished to know how to avoid it. Never was a more important question asked than this. It is the question which all convicted sinners ask. It implies an apprehension of danger, a sense of guilt, and a readiness to "yield the will" to the claims of God. This was the same question asked by Paul Acts 9:6, "Lord, what wilt thou have me to do?" and by the jailor Acts 16:30 "He ...came, trembling, ...and said, Sirs, what must I do to be saved?" The state of mind in this case - the case of a convicted sinner - consists in:

(1) A deep sense of the evil of the past life; remembrance of a thousand crimes perhaps before forgotten; a pervading and deepening conviction that the heart, and conversation, and life have been evil, and deserve condemnation.

(2) Apprehension about the justice of God; alarm when the mind looks upward to him, or onward to the day of death and judgment.

(3) an earnest wish, amounting sometimes to agony, to be delivered from this sense of condemnation and this apprehension of the future.

(4) a readiness to sacrifice all to the will of God; to surrender the governing purpose of the mind, and to do what he requires. In this state the soul is prepared to receive the offers of eternal life; and when the sinner comes to this, the offers of mercy meet his case, and he yields himself to the Lord Jesus, and finds peace.

In regard to this discourse of Peter, and this remarkable result, we may observe:

(1) That this is the first discourse which was preached after the ascension of Christ, and is a model which the ministers of religion should imitate.

(2) it is a clear and close argument. There is no ranting, no declamation, nothing but truth presented in a clear and striking manner. It abounds with proof of his main point, and supposes that his hearers were rational beings, and capable of being influenced by truth. Ministers have no right to address people as incapable of reason and thought, nor to imagine, because they are speaking on religious subjects, that therefore they are at liberty to speak nonsense.

(3) though these were eminent sinners, and had added to the crime of murdering the Messiah that of deriding the Holy Spirit and the ministers of the gospel, yet Peter reasoned with them coolly, and endeavored to convince them of their guilt. People should be treated as endowed with reason, and as capable of seeing the force and beauty of the great truths of religion.

(4) the arguments of Peter were adapted to produce this effect on their minds, and to impress them deeply with the sense of their guilt. He proved to them that they had been guilty of putting the Messiah to death; that God had raised him up, and that they were now in the midst of the scenes which established one strong proof of the truth of what he was saying. No class of truths could have been so well adapted to make an impression of their guilt as these.

(5) Conviction for sin is a rational process on a sinner's mind. It is the proper state produced by a view of past sins. It is suffering truth to make an appropriate impression; suffering the mind to feel as it ought to feel. The man who is guilty ought to be willing to see and confess it. It is no disgrace to confess an error, or to feel deeply when we know we are guilty. Disgrace consists in a hypocritical desire to conceal crime; in the pride that is unwilling to avow it; in the falsehood which denies it. To feel it and to acknowledge it is the mark of an open and ingenuous mind.

(6) these same truths are adapted still to produce conviction for sin. The sinner's treatment of the Messiah should produce grief and alarm. He did not murder him, but he has rejected him; he did not crown him with thorns, but he has despised him; he did not insult him when hanging on the cross, but he has a thousand times insulted him since; he did not pierce his side with the spear, but he has pierced his heart by rejecting him and contemning his mercy. "For these things he should weep." In the Saviour's resurrection he has also a deep interest. He rose as the pledge that we may rise; and when the sinner looks forward, he should remember that he must meet the ascended Son of God. The Saviour reigns; he lives, Lord of all. The sinner's deeds now are aimed at his throne, and his heart, and his crown. All his crimes are seen by his sovereign, and it is not safe to mock the Son of God on his throne, or to despise him who will soon come to judgment. When the sinner feels these truths he should tremble and cry out, What shall Ido?

(7) we see here how the Spirit operates in producing conviction of sin. It is not in an arbitrary manner; it is in accordance with truth, and by the truth. Nor have we a right to expect that he will convict and convert people except as the truth is presented to their minds. They who desire success in the gospel should present clear, striking, and impressive truth, for such only God is accustomed to bless.

(8) we have in the conduct of Peter and the other apostles a striking instance of the power of the gospel. Just before, Peter, trembling and afraid, had denied his Master with an oath; now, in the presence of the murderers of the Son of God, he boldly charged them with their crime, and dared their fury. Just before, all the disciples forsook the Lord Jesus and fled; now, in the presence of his murderers, they lifted their voice and proclaimed their guilt and danger, even in the city where he had been just arraigned and put to death. What could have produced this change but the power of God? And is there not proof here that a religion which produces such changes came from heaven?

38

Acts 2:38

Open passage

简体中文

彼得说 - 虽然别人也对他们讲过话,但彼得是主要的讲员。如今他代表众人,指示众人当怎样行。

你们各人要悔改 - 见 Matthew 3:2 的注释。悔改含着为罪得罪神而生的忧伤,并离弃它的决心。它不只是惧怕罪的后果,或惧怕神在地狱中的忿怒。它是这样看待罪——视其本身为恶——以致心思恨恶它、离弃它。即使撇开罪的一切刑罚不谈,真正悔改的人也恨恶它。即使罪能为他带来幸福,能增进他的快乐享受,且没有任何将来的刑罚随之而来,他也会恨恶它、转离它。罪是恶的、神恨恶罪,这一事实本身就足以成为真悔改者恨恶并离弃它的理由。假的悔改惧怕罪的后果;真的悔改惧怕罪本身。彼得所劝的这些人只是受了惊吓;他们惧怕忿怒,尤其是弥赛亚的忿怒。他们并没有真正看见罪之为恶,只是害怕刑罚。彼得并不把这种惊恐视为真正的悔改。这样的知罪不久便会消退,除非他们的悔改变得彻底而完全。因此,他吩咐他们要悔改,转离罪恶,以罪为邪恶苦涩的事而为它忧伤,并以正当的方式表达他们的忧伤。由此我们可以学到:

(1)仅仅知罪并没有安全;它可能很快消逝,使灵魂像先前一样漫不经心。

(2)仅仅惊恐或知罪并无良善或圣洁可言。鬼魔也信……战惊。人可以惧怕,却仍存着行恶的坚决意图,只要他能不受惩罚地行。

(3)许多人深受困扰、惊惶,却从不悔改。没有一种境况比这里更容易使灵魂受骗。惊恐被当作悔改;战兢被当作敬虔的忧伤;对忿怒的惧怕被当作对神的真敬畏。

(4)在这样的心境中,唯一能带来安舒的,是真正的悔改。坦白承认罪、严肃立志离弃罪、真正恨恶罪,是唯一能使心灵安静下来的。心灵的构造就是如此,别无一物能带来安舒。但当我们愿意公开承认罪责的那一刻,心灵便卸下重担,知罪的灵魂寻得平安。在这样做之先,在对罪的抓紧未断之先,不会有平安。

(5)我们在此看见当给知罪的罪人什么指引。我们不可叫他等候;不可让他以为自己已在正途;不可叫他继续寻求;不可称他为哀哭者;不可站在他那一边,仿佛神错了、神苛刻;也不可劝他阅读、查考,把这问题推到将来。我们应当指引他悔改,为罪哀恸,并离弃罪恶。宗教要求他立即借着真正的悔改将自己交给神;借着承认神是对的、他是错的;并借着立志过圣洁的生活。

受洗 - 见 Matthew 3:6、Matthew 3:16 的注释。基督给使徒们的指示是,当给一切相信的人施洗,Matthew 28:19;Mark 16:16。犹太人素来没有受过洗;如今受洗,便是承认基督的宗教,便是当众宣告他们接纳耶稣为他们的弥赛亚。这就等于说,他们应当公开地、明确地接纳耶稣基督为他们的救主。福音要求这样的承认,任何人都没有自由加以保留。对一切寻求生命之道的人,都要作同样的宣告。他们当运用悔改;然后,不加任何不必要的耽延,借着领受福音的礼仪将它表明出来。人若不愿意承认宗教,他们便是没有宗教。他们若不肯以正当的方式表明自己真正依附基督,便证明他们没有这种依附。洗礼是水的施行,表明洁净的需要,并象征那唯独能洁净灵魂的、来自神的影响。它也是一种向神的事奉奉献的形式。

奉耶稣基督的名 - 不是 εἰς eis(进入),而是 ἐπί epi(在其上)。洗礼的通常形式是归于父、子、圣灵的名下——εἰς eis。这里的意思不是指奉耶稣基督的权柄施洗,而是指为他并他的事奉而受洗;以这方式,并借这公开的承认,奉献给他和他的事业。这说法字面是“在耶稣基督的名上”:即以之为洗礼的根基,或作为洗礼之合宜性所依的基础。换言之,就是在这一举动中承认他是其名所表明的——罪人唯一的盼望、他的救赎主、主、称义者、君王(Prof. Hackett, in loco)。耶稣基督的名意同耶稣基督自己。奉他的名受洗,就是献身于他。“名”一词常这样使用。他们要作的承认,归结起来就是:认罪;决意从罪转回;接纳耶稣为弥赛亚和救主;以及决心作他的门徒、献身于他的事奉。照样,1 Corinthians 10:2 “归了摩西”的受洗,意思是以摩西为领袖和引导者。这并不等于说,在施行洗礼的礼仪时,他们只用耶稣基督的名。更可能的是,他们使用救主亲自所规定的形式(Matthew 28:19);不过,由于基督徒特有的记号乃是接待并尊崇耶稣基督,这里便以此名暗示其全部。Acts 19:5 也是同样情形。

叫你们的罪得赦 - 不只是钉死弥赛亚的罪,而是罪的全体。洗礼本身没有任何能洗除罪的东西。那只能借着神借基督的赎罪所施的赦免之怜悯而成。但洗礼表明愿意以那方式蒙赦免,并且庄严宣告我们的信念:除此外别无赦免之路。来受洗的人,是带着自认是罪人的告白而来;认定除了福音以外别无怜悯之路;并表明愿意遵行救恩的条件,照着借耶稣基督所赐下的样子接受它。

就必领受…… - 这里圣灵的恩赐,不是指他非凡的恩赐或行神迹的能力,而只是说:你们必分享圣灵的影响——“只要它们适合你们的光景”——只要为你们的安慰、平安与成圣所需要的那样多。没有证据表明他们都领受了行神迹的能力,这段经文的上下文也不要求我们这样理解。它也不是说他们未曾“被他的感动所唤醒”。一切真正的知罪都是出于他,John 16:8-10。但圣灵的职分也是安慰、光照、赐平安,并借此证明灵魂已重生。彼得所指的,大概就是这一点;这一切,凡重生的并承认信基督的人都拥有。有平安、宁静、喜乐;有敬虔的证据,而这证据正是圣灵影响的产物。“圣灵所结的果子就是爱、喜乐、和平”等,Galatians 5:22、Galatians 5:24。

English original

Then Peter said unto them - Peter had been the chief speaker, though others had also addressed them. He now, in the name of all, directed the multitude what to do.

Repent - See the notes on Matthew 3:2. Repentance implies sorrow for sin as committed against God, along with a purpose to forsake it. It is not merely a fear of the consequences of sin or of the wrath of God in hell. It is such a view of sin, as evil in itself, as to lead the mind to hate it and forsake it. Laying aside all view of the punishment of sin, the true penitent hates it. Even if sin were the means of procuring him happiness; if it would promote his gratification and be unattended with any future punishment, he would hate it and turn from it. The mere fact that it is evil, and that God hates it, is a sufficient reason why those who are truly penitent hate it and forsake it. False repentance dreads the consequences of sin; true repentance dreads sin itself. These persons whom Peter addressed had been merely alarmed; they were afraid of wrath, and especially of the wrath of the Messiah. They had no true sense of sin as an evil, but were simply afraid of punishment. This alarm Peter did not regard as by any means genuine repentance. Such conviction for sin would soon wear off, unless their repentance became thorough and complete. Hence, he told them to repent, to turn from sin, to exercise sorrow for it as an evil and bitter thing, and to express their sorrow in the proper manner. We may learn here:

(1) That there is no safety in mere conviction for sin: it may soon pass off, and leave the soul as thoughtless as before.

(2) there is no goodness or holiness in mere alarm or conviction. The devils ...tremble. A man may fear who yet has a firm purpose to do evil, if he can do it with impunity.

(3) many are greatly troubled and alarmed who never repent. There is no situation where souls are so easily deceived as here. Alarm is taken for repentance; trembling for godly sorrow; and the fear of wrath is taken to be the true fear of God.

(4) true repentance is the only thing in such a state of mind that can give any relief. An ingenuous confession of sin, a solemn purpose to forsake it, and a true hatred of it, is the only thing that can give the mind composure. Such is the constitution of the mind that nothing else will furnish relief. But the moment we are willing to make an open confession of guilt, the mind is delivered of its burden, and the convicted soul finds peace. Until this is done, and the hold on sin is broken, there can be no peace.

(5) we see here what direction is to be given to a convicted sinner. We are not to direct him to wait; nor to lead him to suppose that he is in a good way; nor to tell him to continue to seek; nor to call him a mourner; nor to take sides with him, as if God were wrong and harsh; nor to advise him to read, and search, and postpone the subject to a future time. We are to direct him to repent; to mourn over his sins, and to forsake them. Religion demands that he should at once surrender himself to God by genuine repentance; by confession that God is right and that he is wrong; and by a firm purpose to live a life of holiness.

Be baptized - See the notes on Matthew 3:6, Matthew 3:16. The direction which Christ gave to his apostles was that they should baptize all who believed, Matthew 28:19; Mark 16:16. The Jews had not been baptized; and a baptism now would be a profession of the religion of Christ, or a declaration made before the world that they embraced Jesus as their Messiah. It was equivalent to saying that they should publicly and professedly embrace Jesus Christ as their Saviour. The gospel requires such a profession, and no one is at liberty to withhold it. A similar declaration is to be made to all who are inquiring the way to life. They are to exercise repentance; and then, without any unnecessary delay, to evince it by partaking of the ordinances of the gospel. If people are unwilling to profess religion, they have none. If they will not, in the proper way, show that they are truly attached to Christ, it is proof that they have no such attachment. Baptism is the application of water, as expressive of the need of purification, and as emblematic of the influences from God that can alone cleanse the soul. It is also a form of dedication to the service of God.

In the name of Jesus Christ - Not εἰς eis, into, but ἐπί epi, upon. The usual form of baptism is into the name of the Father, etc. - εἰς eis. Here it does not mean to be baptized by the authority of Jesus Christ, but it means to be baptized for him and his service; to be consecrated in this way, and by this public profession, to him and to his cause. The expression is literally upon the name of Jesus Christ: that is, as the foundation of the baptism, or as that on which its propriety rested or was based. In other words, it is with an acknowledgment of him in that act as being what his name imports the Sinner's only Hope, his Redeemer, Lord, Justifier, King (Prof. Hackett, in loco). The name of Jesus Christ means the same as Jesus Christ himself. To be baptized to his name is to be devoted to him. The word "name" is often thus used. The profession which they were to make amounted to this: a confession of sins; a hearty purpose to turn from them; a reception of Jesus as the Messiah and as a Saviour; and a determination to become his followers and to be devoted to his service. Thus, 1 Corinthians 10:2, to be baptized unto Moses means to take him as a leader and guide. It does not follow that, in administering the ordinance of baptism, they used only the name of Jesus Christ. It is much more probable that they used the form prescribed by the Saviour himself Matthew 28:19; though, as the special mark of a Christian is that he receives and honors Jesus Christ, this name is used here as implying the whole. The same thing occurs in Acts 19:5.

For the remission of sins - Not merely the sin of crucifying the Messiah, but of all sins. There is nothing in baptism itself that can wash away sin. That can be done only by the pardoning mercy of God through the atonement of Christ. But baptism is expressive of a willingness to be pardoned in that way, and is a solemn declaration of our conviction that there is no other way of remission. He who comes to be baptized, comes with a professed conviction that he is a sinner; that there is no other way of mercy but in the gospel, and with a professed willingness to comply with the terms of salvation, and to receive it as it is offered through Jesus Christ.

And ye shall receive ... - The gift of the Holy Spirit here does not mean his extraordinary gifts, or the power of working miracles, but it simply means, you shall partake of the influences of the Holy Spirit "as far as they may be adapted to your case" - as far as may be needful for your comfort, peace, and sanctification. There is no evidence that they were all endowed with the power of working miracles, nor does the connection of the passage require us thus to understand it. Nor does it mean that they had not been awakened "by his influences." All true conviction is from him, John 16:8-10. But it is also the office of the Spirit to comfort, to enlighten, to give peace, and thus to give evidence that the soul is born again. To this, probably, Peter refers; and this all who are born again and profess faith in Christ possess. There is peace, calmness, joy; there is evidence of piety, and that evidence is the product of the influences of the Spirit. "The fruit of the Spirit is love, joy, peace," etc., Galatians 5:22, Galatians 5:24.

39

Acts 2:39

Open passage

简体中文

因为这应许 - 即关于他正在讲论的那件特别之事——圣灵的影响——的应许。这应许他在讲道开头已经提出(Acts 2:17),如今又应用于他们身上。圣灵既应许降在犹太人和他们的儿女身上,它就适用于他们当时所处的境况。失丧罪人的唯一指望在乎神的诸应许;能安慰知罪之灵魂的,唯有神必赦免、必拯救的盼望。

给你们 - 即给你们犹太人,尽管你们钉死了弥赛亚。这应许特别关乎犹太百姓。

和你们的儿女 - 在约珥书中,是给他们的儿女,而他们仍将是大到能说预言的年龄。类似的应许也见于 Isaiah 44:3:“我要将我的灵浇灌你的后裔,将我的福降临你的子孙”;以及 Isaiah 59:21:“我加给你的灵、传给你的话,必永不离开你的口,也不离你后裔与你后裔之后裔的口,从今直到永远,这是耶和华说的。”在这些及类似经文中,所指的都是他们的后裔或子孙。它不是仅仅指作为孩童的孩童,也不应被引来唯独应用于婴孩。这是给父母的应许:救恩的福气将不限于父母,也要延伸到他们的后裔。在这应许之下,父母可以受鼓励为神养育儿女;他们有权柄在基督教洗礼的礼仪中把儿女献给神;并且可以信靠他恩惠的旨意,使救恩的福气这样世世代代延续下去。

并一切 - 即给全人类;不限于犹太人。

在远方的人 - 指别地的人。彼得在这里所指的,大概是在别国分散居住的犹太人;因为他似乎还不明白福音要传给外邦人。见 Acts 10。然而这应许对外邦人和犹太人同样适用,使徒们后来也被带到这样的理解,Acts 10;Romans 10:12、Romans 10:14-20;11。外邦人有时明确地以“远处的人”一语来指明,Ephesians 2:13、Ephesians 2:17;他们被描述为借着基督的血得以亲近。这说法同样适用于那些因罪恶和邪情私欲而远离神的人。他们若肯归回,应许也延伸到他们。

就是主我们神所召来的 - 应许不是给那些不听福音的人,也不是给那些不顺从福音的人;而是给那些神以他恩惠的护理差遣福音所及的人。他有赦免的权能与权利。彼得的意思是:这应许是宽宏、丰富、白给的;它适合于众人,也可以应用于众人;在预备和应许上没有任何缺欠或不足,神可以随己意将它延伸给任何人。我们在此看见怜悯的提供何等宽宏、丰富。神在他恩典的预备上不受限制;这计划适用于全人类。神的目的也是要将它传给万民,并且他已给他的教会一个庄严的托付去行这事。这些预备既已作成——充分地作成;既适合于万民;却至今只被他的人民传给人类这么小的一部分——想到这事,我们不能不深感沉痛。生命的应许若是给众人的,教会就有责任把怜悯的信息传给众人。

English original

For the promise - That is, the promise respecting the particular thing of which he was speaking - the influences of the Holy Spirit. This promise he had adduced in the beginning of his discourse Acts 2:17, and he now applies it to them. As the Spirit was promised to descend on Jews and their sons and daughters, it was applicable to them in the circumstances in which they then were. The only hope of lost sinners is in the promises of God, and the only thing that can give comfort to a soul that is convicted of sin is the hope that God will pardon and save.

Unto you - To you Jews, even though you have crucified the Messiah. The promise had special reference to the Jewish people.

To your children - In Joel, to their sons and daughters, who would, nevertheless, be old enough to prophesy. Similar promises occur in Isaiah 44:3, "I will pour my Spirit on thy seed, and my blessing on thine offspring"; and in Isaiah 59:21, "My Spirit that is upon thee, and my words which I have put in thy mouth, shall not depart out of thy mouth, nor out of the mouth of thy seed, nor out of the mouth of thy seed's seed, saith the Lord, from henceforth and forever." In these and similar places their descendants or posterity are denoted. It does not refer merely to children as children, and should not be adduced as applicable exclusively to infants. It is a promise I to parents that the blessings of salvation shall not be confined to parents, but shall be extended also to their posterity. Under this promise parents may be encouraged to train up their children for God; they are authorized to devote them to him in the ordinance of Christian baptism, and they may trust in his gracious purpose thus to perpetuate the blessings of salvation from age to age.

To all - To the whole race; not limited to Jews.

Afar off - To those in other lands. It is probable that Peter here referred to the Jews who were scattered in other nations; for he does not seem yet to have understood that the gospel was to be preached to the Gentiles. See Acts 10:Yet the promise was equally applicable to the Gentiles as the Jews, and the apostles were afterward brought so to understand it, Acts 10; Romans 10:12, Romans 10:14-20; 11. The Gentiles are sometimes clearly indicated by the expression "afar off Ephesians 2:13, Ephesians 2:17; and they are represented as having been brought nigh by the blood of Christ. The phrase is equally applicable to those who have been far off from God by their sins and their evil affections. To them also the promise is extended if they will return.

Even as many ... - The promise is not to those who do not hear the gospel, nor to those who do not obey it; but it is to those to whom God in his gracious providence shall send it. He has the power and right to pardon. The meaning of Peter is, that the promise is ample, full, free; that it is suited to all, and may be applied to all; that there is no defect or lack in the provisions or promises, but that God may extend it to whomsoever he pleases. We see here how ample and full are the offers of mercy. God is hot limited in the provisions of his grace; but the plan is applicable to all mankind. It is also the purpose of God to send it to all people, and he has given a solemn charge to his church to do it. We cannot reflect but with deep pain on the fact that, although these provisions have been made - fully made; that they are adapted to all people; but that yet they have been extended by his people to so small a portion of the human family. If the promise of life is to all, it is the duty of the church to send to all the message of mercy.

40

Acts 2:40

Open passage

简体中文

用许多别的话 - 这篇讲道虽是新约中最长的之一,仍不过是个大纲。然而它含有救恩计划的核心,并且为达到其目的作了极为恰当的安排。

作见证 - 即作证。他见证基督教的诸应许;见证关乎罪人危险的真理;并见证关于那世代品格的真理。

劝勉 - 他借着论证和应许恳劝他们。

救自己 - 这话在这里的意思是:使自己脱离这世代的影响、意见和结局。它意味着他们当殷勤努力,救自己脱离出来。神以人为自由的行动者对待。他呼召人运用自己的能力和努力来得救。他们若不运用自己的力量,便永不能得救。他们得救时,要将赞美归给神——因他使他们倾向寻求他,并因他们借以得救的恩典。

脱离这弯曲的世代 - 指这个时代或这族的人,即当时的犹太人。他们当惧怕的危险,不是来自这世代之人手中的逼迫,而是来自与他们同在、与他们同谋、同感的那境况。他们要逃脱的,是他们意见的影响等。那世代败坏邪恶,声名昭著。见 Matthew 23;Matthew 12:39;Matthew 16:4;Mark 8:38。他们钉死了弥赛亚;他们即将因他们的罪被毁灭。

这弯曲的世代 - “弯曲”:“乖僻、顽梗、不易引导或教导”(韦氏词典Webster)。我们的救主在 Matthew 11:16-19 中对那世代也作了同样的描述。他们一贯显出这种品格。他们圆滑、狡黠、似是而非;但他们在原则上败坏,在行为上邪恶。法利赛人对民众有极大的控制力。脱离他们,就是公然藐视他们一切的权势与教义;就是疏远自己的师长朋友;就是对抗那些居高位者、以及那些久已声称有权教导和引导这民族之人的权威。如今这些醒悟之人的主要危险正是来自那世代:他们会被讥诮、被诋毁、被逼迫,以致放弃他们的严肃认真,转回自己的罪中。因此,彼得劝他们当即与他们断绝,把自己献给基督。由此我们可以学到:

(1)罪人若要得救,就必须努力。若不自奋,便没有应许。

(2)醒悟之人的主要危险来自他们从前的同伴。这些人往往邪恶、狡诈、富有、有权。他们可能是亲属,会借讥诮、争辩或逼迫,驱散人的严肃印象。他们对人的情感有强大的掌握,并会利用它来拦阻醒悟的人成为基督徒。

(3)醒悟的人应当立定心志,当即与恶伴断绝,归附基督和他的子民。要做到这一点,也许除了定意完全离开那些不信者、讥诮者和亵渎者的社交圈之外,别无他法。他们当离弃世界,把自己交给神,并定意在凡事上只照本分所要求的、并以荣耀神为至上目的所容许的程度与世界接触。

English original

Many other words - This discourse, though one of the longest in the New Testament, is but an outline. It contains, however, the substance of the plan of salvation, and is admirably arranged to attain its object.

Testify - Bear witness to. He bore witness to the promises of Christianity; to the truths pertaining to the danger of sinners; and to the truth respecting the character of that generation.

Exhort - He entreated them by arguments and promises.

Save yourselves - This expression here denotes, preserve yourselves from the influence, opinions, and fate of this generation. It implies that they were to use diligence and effort to deliver themselves. God deals with people as free agents. He calls upon them to put forth their own power and effort to be saved. Unless they put forth their own strength, they will never be saved. When they are saved, they will ascribe to God the praise for having inclined them to seek him, and for the grace whereby they are saved.

This generation - This age or race of people; the Jews then living. They were not to apprehend danger from them from which they were to deliver themselves; but they were to apprehend danger from being with them, united in their plans; designs, and feelings. From the influence of their opinions, etc., they were to escape. That generation was signally corrupt and wicked. See Matthew 23; Matthew 12:39; Matthew 16:4; Mark 8:38. They had crucified the Messiah; and they were, for their sins, soon to be destroyed.

Order? this untoward generation? - Untoward: "Perverse, refractory, not easily guided or taught" (Webster). The same character our Saviour had given of that generation in Matthew 11:16-19. This character they had shown uniformly. They were smooth, cunning, plausible; but they were corrupt in principle, and wicked in conduct. The Pharisees had a vast hold on the people. To break away from them was to set at defiance all their power and doctrines; to alienate themselves from their teachers and friends; to brave the authority of those in office, and those who had long claimed the right of teaching and guiding the nation. The chief danger of those who were now awakened was from that generation; that they would deride, or denounce, or persecute them, and induce them to abandon their seriousness, and turn back to their sins. And hence, Peter exhorted them at once to break off from them, and give themselves to Christ. We may hence learn:

(1) That if sinners will be saved they must make an effort. There is no promise to any unless they will exert themselves.

(2) the principal danger which besets those who are awakened arises from their former companions. They are often wicked, cunning, rich, mighty. They may be their kindred, and will seek to drive off their serious impressions by derision, or argument, or persecution. They have a powerful hold on the affections, and they will seek to use it to prevent those who are awakened from becoming Christians.

(3) those who are awakened should resolve at once to break off from their evil companions, and unite themselves to Christ and his people. There may be no other way in which this can be done than by resolving to forsake altogether the society of those who are infidels, and scoffers, and profane. They should forsake the world, and give themselves up to God, and resolve to have only so much contact with the world, in any respect, as may be required by duty, and as may be consistent with a supreme purpose to live to the honor of God.

41

Acts 2:41

Open passage

简体中文

于是领受他话的人 - 译作“欢然”的词,意为“自由地、甘愿地、喜乐地”。它暗示他们这样做并非出于勉强,而是出于喜乐。宗教不是勉强。人成为基督徒是甘心乐意的;他们以得以借耶稣基督与神和好为特权,欢欢喜喜地这样行。虽然这么多人领受他的话并受了洗,但经文也暗示还有不曾领受的人。聚集的群众中,大概有许多人惊慌、为灵魂担忧,却没有欢喜领受这道。在一切复兴中,都有许多人惊惧、为自己的灵魂焦急,却拒绝接受福音,重又变得漫不经心而灭亡。

他的话 - 指彼得所传关于借耶稣基督罪得赦免的信息。

就受了洗 - 指那些表明愿意接受救恩之提议的人。叙述分明暗示这是在同一天内完成的。他们的归正是立刻的。对他们的要求,就是当即把自己交给神。他们的宣告一经作出,为这宣告作印证的礼仪也随即施行,没有迟延。

那一天 - 彼得的讲道始于早晨九点,Acts 2:15。讲道持续多久,经文没有说;但接纳他们入教并为他们施洗的仪式,显然是在同一天完成的。行这事的方式并未提及;但在耶路撒冷城中,一天之内把三千人完全浸入水中,是极不可能的。整个叙述假定这一切都在城内完成;而城中一天之内为这么多人施行浸礼的设施,是不可能有指望的。况且,按浸水施洗的寻常方式,这么短的时间内这么多人受浸,也难以想象。诚然,这里没有积极的证据说他们没有受浸;但这一叙述正属于那类常常比语言学讨论更令人信服的附带情况,表明这一切都借着把他们完全浸入水中来完成的说法极不可能。还可以进一步留意,这里是迅速接纳人入教的一个例子。这是福音之下第一场伟大的恩典之工,是一切宗教复兴的样板。无疑,这也要成为宗教传道人在接纳人入基督教会一事上行事方式的一个标本。谨慎固然需要;但这例子并没有授权人劝那些表明愿意顺服耶稣基督的人延迟加入教会。人若显出敬虔、真正恨罪、依附主耶稣的证据,就当毫不迟延地归附他的子民。

添了 - 指添入门徒的数目,即归附基督的人。

(约三千)人 - 指人数。比较 1 Peter 3:20;Genesis 12:5。经文并未肯定这一切都发生在耶路撒冷的某一处,也没有说都是一次完成的;大概这是后来查明为当日劳苦的果子、这次宗教复兴的结果。这是福音传道之下圣灵的第一次浇灌;它表明教会中可以期待这样的景象,也表明福音适合在人心行迅速而大能的改变。

English original

They that gladly received - The word rendered "gladly" means "freely, cheerfully, joyfully." It implies that they did it without compulsion, and with joy. Religion is not compulsion. They who become Christians do it cheerfully; they do it rejoicing in the privilege of becoming reconciled to God through Jesus Christ. Though so many received his word and were baptized, yet it is implied that there were others who did not. It is probable that there were multitudes assembled who were alarmed, but who did not receive the word with joy. In all revivals there are many who become alarmed, and who are anxious about their souls, but who refuse to embrace the gospel, and again become thoughtless, and are ruined.

His word - The message which Peter had spoken respecting the pardon of sin through Jesus Christ.

Were baptized - That is, those who professed a readiness to embrace the offers of salvation. The narrative plainly implies that this was done the same day. Their conversion was instantaneous. The demand on them was to yield themselves at once to God. And their profession was made, and the ordinance which sealed their profession administered without delay.

And the same day - The discourse of Peter commenced at nine o'clock in the morning, Acts 2:15. How long it continued it is not said; but the ceremony of admitting them to the church and of baptizing them was evidently performed on the same day. The mode in which this is done is not mentioned; but it is highly improbable that in the midst of the city of Jerusalem three thousand persons were wholly immersed in one day. The whole narrative supposes that it was all done in the city; and yet there is no probability that there were conveniences there for immersing so many persons in a single day. Besides, in the ordinary way of administering baptism by immersion, it is difficult to conceive that so many persons could have been immersed in so short a time. There is, indeed, here no positive proof that they were not immersed; but the narrative is one of those incidental circumstances often much more satisfactory than philological discussion, that show the extreme improbability that all this was done by wholly immersing them in water. It may be further remarked that here is an example of very quick admission to the church. It was the first great work of grace under the gospel. It was the model of all revivals of religion. And it was doubtless intended that this should be a specimen of the manner in which the ministers of religion should act in regard to admissions to the Christian church. Prudence is indeed required; but this example furnishes no warrant for advising those who profess their willingness to obey Jesus Christ, to delay uniting with the church. If persons give evidence of piety, of true hatred of sin, and of attachment to the Lord Jesus; they should unite themselves to his people without delay.

There were added - To the company of disciples, or to the followers of Christ.

Souls - Persons. Compare 1 Peter 3:20; Genesis 12:5. It is not affirmed that all this took place in one part of Jerusalem, or that it was all done at once; but it is probable that this was what was afterward ascertained to be the fruit of this day's labor, the result of this revival of religion. This was the first effusion of the Holy Spirit under the preaching of the gospel; and it shows that such scenes are to be expected in the church, and that the gospel is suited to work a rapid and mighty change in the hearts of people.

42

Acts 2:42

Open passage

简体中文

都恒心遵守 - 即他们恒忍持守,紧紧依附。这是受灵感动而对结果所作的记录。这些人中有谁背道,经上并无记载,也不可臆测。他们虽是忽然归正;虽是忽然被接纳入教;虽遭受许多逼迫、蔑视与试炼,记录却说他们持守了基督教的教训与义务。译作“恒心遵守”的词——προσκαρτεροῦντες proskarterountes——意思是“注视一个人,留在他身旁,不离弃他”。

使徒的教训 - 这不是说他们持守或相信使徒们的教义——尽管那也是事实;而是说他们恒心听从、经常领受他们的教导。今天“教义”(doctrine)一词有了专门的意义,指一套被认为包含在圣经中的抽象观点的汇集与编排。在圣经中,这词单指“教导”。这里的说法表明他们持续领受使徒的教训。归正的一个证据,就是渴望受教于宗教的教义与义务,并乐于听福音的讲道。

彼此交接 - 译作“交接”的词 κοινωνία koinōnia,常被译作“相通”(communion)。它本义是“共同拥有,参与,相交,友谊”。它可以应用于任何可共同拥有、人人有分的事物。这样,一切基督徒都有同样的天家盼望;同样的喜乐;对罪同样的恨恶;同样要对付的仇敌。这样,他们有同样的谈论、情感与祷告的题目;或者说,他们在这些事上彼此相通。初期基督徒也这样凡物公用。这里的词可以应用于这些事中的任何一件或全部——他们的谈论、祷告、危险或财产;意思是他们与使徒联合,无论临到使徒什么,都与他们一同有分。还可以补充说,宗教复兴的效果,就是使基督徒越来越联合,使从前隔阂的人彼此相爱。基督徒自觉是一群弟兄;他们无论在成为基督徒之前相隔多远,如今都有重大而共同的利益;他们在情感、利益、危险、争战、意见以及蒙福不朽的盼望上联合为一。

擘饼 - 叙利亚文译本把这话译作“圣餐”(eucharist)即主的晚餐。然而,这是指他们一同享用日常的食物,还是指爱筵,或是指主的晚餐,无法断定。希伯来人的饼通常做成薄、硬、脆的饼,所以是掰开而不是切开。因此,“一同擘饼”一语是表明“亲密或友谊”极有力的说法,正如希腊人以共饮——συμπόσιον sumposion——来表明它一样。从 Acts 2:44 与 Acts 2:46 相比所用的说法——他们凡物公用——看来,这话倒更可能是指共享日常的饭食。擘饼的动作通常由家主或家长在祝谢之后立刻施行(Lightfoot)。

祈祷 - 这是圣灵影响的一个效果,也是他们改变的一个凭据。真正的复兴必伴随着爱祷告的心。

English original

And they continued stedfastly - They persevered in, or they adhered to. This is the inspired record of the result. That any of these apostatized is nowhere recorded, and is not to be presumed. Though they had been suddenly converted; though they were suddenly admitted to the church; though they were exposed to much persecution and contempt, and to many trials, yet the record is that they adhered to the doctrines and duties of the Christian religion. The word rendered "continued stedfastly" - προσκαρτεροῦντες proskarterountes - means "attending one, remaining by his side, not leaving or forsaking him."

The apostles' doctrine - This does not mean that they held or believed the doctrines of the apostles, though that was true; but it means that they adhered to, or attended on, their teaching or instruction. The word doctrine has now a technical sense, and means a collection and arrangement of abstract views supposed to be contained in the Bible. In the Scriptures the word means simply "teaching"; and the expression here denotes that they continued to attend on their instructions. One evidence of conversion is a desire to be instructed in the doctrines and duties of religion, and a willingness to attend on the preaching of the gospel.

And fellowship - The word rendered "fellowship," κοινωνία koinōnia, is often rendered "communion." It properly denotes "having things in common, or participation, society, friendship." It may apply to anything which may be possessed in common, or in which all may partake. Thus, all Christians have the same hope of heaven; the same joys; the same hatred of sin; the same enemies to contend with. Thus, they have the same subjects of conversation, of feeling, and of prayer; or they have communion in these things. And thus the early Christians had their property in common. The word here may apply to either or to all of these things to their conversation, their prayers, their dangers, or their property; and means that they were united to the apostles, and participated with them in whatever befell them. It may be added that the effect of a revival of religion is to unite Christians more and more, and to bring those who were before separated to union and love. Christians feel that they are a band of brethren, and that, however much they were separated before they became Christians, now they have great and important interests in common; they are united in feelings, in interests, in dangers, in conflicts, in opinions, and in the hopes of a blessed immortality.

Breaking of bread - The Syriac renders this "the eucharist" or the Lord's Supper. It cannot, however, be determined whether this refers to their partaking of their ordinary food together, or to feasts of charity, or to the Lord's Supper. The bread of the Hebrews was made commonly into cakes, thin, hard, and brittle, so that it was broken instead of being cut. Hence, to denote "intimacy or friendship," the phrase "to break bread together" would be very expressive in the same way as the Greeks denoted it by drinking together, συμπόσιον sumposion. From the expression used in Acts 2:44, compare with Acts 2:46, that they had all things common, it would rather seem to be implied that this referred to the participation of their ordinary meals. The action of breaking bread was commonly performed by the master or head of a family immediately after asking a blessing (Lightfoot).

In prayers - This was one effect of the influence of the Spirit, and an evidence of their change. A genuine revival will be always followed by a love of prayer.

43

Acts 2:43

Open passage

简体中文

众人都惧怕 - 即有极大的敬畏或肃穆。群众不久前还讥诮他们(Acts 2:13);但这次神的能力如此显著、如此分明,使一切喧嚷都止息,产生了普遍的敬重与敬畏。神恩典的大工,通常的果效是在一个社群中产生非常的严肃与庄重,连未归正的人也不例外。它抑制、降伏并平息反对。

每一个人 - 即每一个人;意思是普遍临到众人身上;不仅临到那些成为基督徒的人,也临到目睹这些事的众人。一切都适合产生这种惧怕:拿撒勒人耶稣近日被钉十字架;伴随那事的神迹;五旬节那日的事;以及使徒们所行的神迹——这一切都适合把肃穆、深思与忧虑散布到整个社群。

许多奇事神迹 - 见 Acts 2:22 的注释。这是救主所应许的,Mark 16:17。他们所行神迹中的一些,在以下各章中有具体记述。

English original

And fear came - That is, there was great reverence or awe. The multitude had just before derided them Acts 2:13; but so striking and manifest was the power of God on this occasion, that it silenced all clamors, and produced a general veneration and awe. The effect of a great work of God's grace is commonly to produce an unusual seriousness and solemnity in a community, even among those who are not converted. It restrains, subdues, and silences opposition.

Every soul - Every person or individual; that is, upon the people generally; not only on those who became Christians, but upon the multitudes who witnessed these things. All things were suited to produce this fear: the recent crucifixion of Jesus of Nazareth; the wonders that attended that event; the events of the day of Pentecost; and the miracles performed by the apostles, were all suited to diffuse solemnity, thought, anxiety through the community.

Many wonders and signs - See the notes on Acts 2:22. This was promised by the Saviour, Mark 16:17. Some of the miracles which they performed are specified in the following chapters.

44

Acts 2:44

Open passage

简体中文

信的人都在一处 - 即相信耶稣是弥赛亚的人;因为那是他们有别于他人、被人认出的特征。

都在一处 - 即联合;同趋一事。这不是说他们住在同一间屋里,而是说他们联合于同一个团体,或从事同一件事。无疑,他们常为祷告与赞美同聚一处。坚固年轻归信者信心最好的方法之一,就是让他们常常聚在一起祷告、交通、赞美。

凡物公用 - 即他们一切的财产或所有物。见 Acts 4:32-37;Acts 5:1-10。在救主的时代,使徒们显然把一切财产放在公用之中,犹大作了他们的司库。他们视自己为一个有共同需要的家庭,各自拥有大量财产并无用处或正当性。然而即使那时,他们中大概有人仍保留着一部分不必奉献公用之财产的权益。约翰显然保有自己留用的财产,John 19:27。同样清楚的是,救主并没有吩咐他们把财产交入公库,使徒们也没有这样吩咐:Acts 5:4:“田地还没有卖,不是你自己的吗?既卖了,价银不是你作主吗?”所以,这完全是自愿的,也显然是适应初期归信者特殊处境的。他们许多人来自远方,来自帕提亚、玛代、亚拉伯、罗马、阿非利加等地。他们此刻在耶路撒冷停留的时间,大概也比起初打算的更长;而且,因他们接纳了那位刚刚被处死的拿撒勒人耶稣,如今很可能被拒绝于犹太人惯常的接待之外,被排除在他们的常例恩待之外。在这样的境况下,他们同住期间共享财物,既自然又合宜。

English original

All that believed - That is, that believed that Jesus was the Messiah; for that was the distinguishing point by which they were known from others.

Were together - Were united; were joined in the same thing. It does not mean that they lived in the same house, but they were united in the same community, or engaged in the same thing. They were doubtless often together in the same place for prayer and praise. One of the best means for strengthening the faith of young converts is for them often to meet together for prayer, conversation, and praise.

Had all things common - That is, all their property or possessions. See Acts 4:32-37; Acts 5:1-10. The apostles, in the time of the Saviour, evidently had all their property in common stock, and Judas was made their treasurer. They regarded themselves as one family, having common needs, and there was no use or propriety in their possessing extensive property by themselves. Yet even then it is probable that some of them retained an interest in their property which was not supposed to be necessary to be devoted to the common use. It is evident that John thus possessed property which he retained, John 19:27. And it is clear that the Saviour did not command them to give up their property into a common stock, nor did the apostles enjoin it: Acts 5:4, "While it remained, was it not thine own? and after it was sold was it not in thine own power?" It was, therefore, perfectly voluntary, and was as evidently adapted to the special circumstances of the early converts. Many of them came from abroad. They were from Parthia, and Media, and Arabia, and Rome, and Africa, etc. It is probable, also, that they now remained longer in Jerusalem than they had at first proposed; and it is not at all improbable that they would be denied now the usual hospitalities of the Jews, and excluded from their customary kindness, because they had embraced Jesus of Nazareth, who had been just put to death. In these circumstances, it was natural and proper that they should share their property while they remained together.

45

Acts 2:45

Open passage

简体中文

卖了 - 即他们卖了必要的部分,为要筹得供给彼此需要的手段。

田产家业 - 指财产,特别是不动产。κτήματα ktēmata 一词本指他们的固定财产,如田地、房屋、葡萄园等。译作“家业”的 ὑπάρξεις huparxeis 一词,指他们的动产。

分给各人 - 他们把这些分给人,照贫穷弟兄的需要供给他们。

照各人所需用的 - 这话限定并明确了前面所说的意思。这段经文并不是说他们变卖了一切所有,也不是说他们放弃了一切财产的权利,而是说他们把一切都看作公用,以致若有必要供给别人的需要,便甘愿舍弃。因此,财产被放在使徒的脚前,请他们自由分配,以应付穷人的需要,Acts 4:34-35。

这是宗教早期传布中的一个重要事件,可以引发许多有益的思考:

  1. 我们看见宗教的果效。对财产的贪爱是人心中最强烈的情感之一。惟有宗教能胜过它;福音最初的果效之一,就是松开了基督徒对财产的紧握。

  2. 教会有责任供给其贫穷缺乏的肢体。财产如今当在某种程度上视为公用,使穷人的需要可以由富足的人供给,这是无可置疑的。比较 Matthew 26:11。

  3. 若问初期门徒为何显出这样甘愿舍弃财产的心,可以回答说:

(1)使徒们先前已经这样行了。救主的一家凡物公用。

(2)宗教的本性就是要这样行。

(3)这次聚集之人的处境有此需要。他们许多人来自远方,而且大概许多是耶路撒冷民间较穷的阶层。在这事上,他们显明了教会中为穷人当行的事,历代皆然。

  1. 若问这在初期基督徒中是否通行,可以回答说:没有证据表明它是通行的。这里和 Acts 4:32-37、Acts 5:1-7 提到它。看来连后来在犹太归信的人也没有都这样行;也没有证据表明在安提阿、以弗所、哥林多、腓立比、罗马等地这样行过。宗教的果效是使人慷慨、甘愿供给穷人,这是无可置疑的。见 2 Corinthians 8:19;2 Corinthians 9:2;1 Corinthians 16:2;Galatians 2:10。但没有证据表明,变卖财产、放在使徒脚前是普遍的作法。显然,宗教并不是要人拆掉社会中一切的秩序,而是要拥有财产的人甘心乐意地舍弃它,以帮助贫穷缺乏的人。

  2. 那么,若问如今是否应当拆毁一切财产的秩序,信徒是否应当凡物公用,我们可以回答:“不”。因为:

(1)这是非凡的特例。

(2)使徒们甚至没有以此吩咐他们。

(3)别处并无此实行。

(4)这是行不通的。凡实行凡物公有的社群,没有长久兴盛的。它曾被多次尝试——被外邦人、被不信者、被狂热的基督徒教派。它很快就以无政府、放纵、怠惰与放荡告终;或者更狡猾的人攫取大部分财产,控制全局。除非众人都被造得完全相同,这样的社群便无可指望;即使可能,也并不可取。神显然有意叫人以获利之心受激励而勤劳;然后他要求把所得奉献于他的事奉。尽管如此,这仍是基督徒慷慨的一个高贵实例,显明了宗教松开世人惯常紧握世界之握持的大能。它也斥责那些——唉,为数众多——不肯出一点东西造福同胞灵魂或身体的宗教徒。

English original

And sold - That is, they sold as much as was necessary in order to procure the means of providing for the needs of each other.

Possessions - Property, particularly real estate. This word, κτήματα ktēmata, refers properly to their fixed property, as lands, houses, vineyards, etc. The word rendered "goods," ὑπάρξεις huparxeis, refers to their personal or movable "property."

And parted them to all - They distributed them to supply the needs of their poorer brethren, according to their necessities.

As every man had need - This expression limits and fixes the meaning of what is said before. The passage does not mean that they sold all their possessions, or that they relinquished their title to all their property, but that they so far regarded all as common as to be willing to part with it if it was needful to supply the needs of the others. Hence, the property was laid at the disposal of the apostles, and they were desired to distribute it freely to meet the needs of the poor, Acts 4:34-35.

This was an important incident in the early propagation of religion, and it may suggest many useful reflections:

  1. We see the effect of religion. The love of property is one of the strongest affections which people have. There is nothing that will overcome it but religion. That will; and one of the first effects of the gospel was to loosen the hold of Christians on property.

  2. It is the duty of the church to provide for the needs of its poor and needy members. There can be no doubt that property should now be regarded as so far common as that the needs of the poor should be supplied by those who are rich. Compare Matthew 26:11.

  3. If it be asked why the early disciples evinced this readiness to part with their property in this manner, it may be replied:

(1) That the apostles had done it before them. The family of the Saviour had all things common.

(2) it was the nature of religion to do it.

(3) the circumstances of the persons assembled on this occasion were such as to require it. They were many of them from distant regions, and probably many of them of the poorer class of the people in Jerusalem. In this they evinced what should be done in behalf of the poor in the church at all times.

  1. If it be asked whether this was done commonly among the early Christians, it may be replied that there is no evidence that it was. It is mentioned here, and in Acts 4:32-37, and Acts 5:1-7. It does not appear that it was done even by all who were afterward converted in Judea; and there is no evidence that it was done in Antioch, Ephesus, Corinth, Philippi, Rome, etc. That the effect of religion was to make people liberal and willing to provide for the poor there can be no doubt. See 2 Corinthians 8:19; 2 Corinthians 9:2; 1 Corinthians 16:2; Galatians 2:10. But there is no proof that it was common to part with their possessions and to lay them at the feet of the apostles. Religion does not contemplate, evidently, that people should break up all the arrangements in society, but it contemplates that those who have property should be ready and willing to part with it for the help of the poor and needy.

  2. If it be asked, then, whether all the arrangements of property should be broken up now, and believers have all things in common, we are prepared to answer "No." Because:

(1) This was an extraordinary case.

(2) it was not even enjoined by the apostles on them.

(3) it was practiced nowhere else.

(4) it would be impracticable. No community where all things were held in common has long prospered. It has been attempted often, by pagans, by infidels, and by fanatical sects of Christians. It ends soon in anarchy, licentiousness, idleness, and profligacy; or the more cunning secure the mass of the property, and control the whole. Until all people are made alike, there could be no hope of such a community; and if there could be, it would not be desirable. God evidently intended that people should be excited to industry by the hope of gain; and then he demands that their gains shall be devoted to his service. Still, this was a noble instance of Christian generosity, and evinced the power of religion in loosing the hold which people commonly have on the world. It rebukes also those professors of religion, of whom, alas, there are many, who give nothing to benefit either the souls or bodies of their fellow-men.

46

Acts 2:46

Open passage

简体中文

同心合意 - 比较 Acts 1:14;Acts 2:1。

在殿里 - 这是公众敬拜之所;门徒们不愿离开他们的祖宗长久敬拜神的地方。这不是说他们一直留在殿里,而是说他们在惯常祷告的时辰——早晨九点和下午三点——在殿里。

擘饼 - 见 Acts 2:42 的注释。

挨家挨户 - 旁注作“在家里”。叙利亚文与阿拉伯文译本也是如此。然而通行的解释是:他们在各家挨次这样行,或在这家、或在哪家,视方便而定。若这是指他们日常的饭食,那么意思是他们共享自己所有的;而“用饭”这一说法,似暗示这是指他们共用的饭食,而非主的晚餐。

用饭 - 即享用他们的食物。“meat”一词在我们今日专指“肉食”;但在圣经和古英语作者中,它用于指任何种类的“食物”。这里指一切养生的东西——τροφῆς trophēs——而使用这词便证明它不是指主的晚餐;因为那礼仪在圣经中从未被描述为日常饭食、为滋养身体而设。比较 1 Corinthians 11:33-34。

欢喜 - 即喜乐地。这是宗教的果效之一。宗教绝非阴郁;它把幸福散布在心中;连我们寻常的娱乐,它也增添其喜乐。

诚实 - 意即怀着真诚纯洁的心。他们知足而感恩。他们不困惑忧虑;不贪求奢华的生活,也不追逐世人虚妄的目标。比较 Romans 12:8;2 Corinthians 1:12;Colossians 3:22;Ephesians 6:5。

English original

With one accord - Compare Acts 1:14; Acts 2:1.

In the temple - This was the public place of worship; and the disciples were not disposed to leave the place where their fathers had so long worshipped God. This does not mean that they were constantly in the temple, but only at the customary hours of prayer - at nine o'clock in the morning, and at three o'clock in the afternoon.

And breaking bread - See the notes on Acts 2:42.

From house to house - In the margin, "at home." So the Syriac and Arabic. The common interpretation, however, is, that they did it in their various houses, now in this and now in that, as might be convenient. If it refers to their ordinary meals, then it means that they partook in common of what they possessed, and the expression "did eat their meat" seems to imply that this refers to their common meals, and not to the Lord's Supper.

Did eat their meat - Did partake of their food. The word "meat" with us is applied to "flesh." In the Bible, and in Old English authors, it is applied to "provisions" of any kind. Here it means all kinds of sustenance; what nourished them - τροφῆς trophēs - and the use of this word proves that it does not refer to the Lord's Supper; for that ordinance is nowhere represented as designed for an ordinary meal, or to nourish the body. Compare 1 Corinthians 11:33-34.

With gladness - With rejoicing. This is one of the effects of religion. It is far from gloom; it diffuses happiness over the mind; it bestows additional joy in the participation of even our ordinary pleasures.

Singleness of heart - This means with a sincere and pure heart. They were satisfied and thankful. They were not perplexed or anxious; nor were they solicitous for the luxurious living, or aspiring after the vain objects of the people of the world. Compare Romans 12:8; 2 Corinthians 1:12; Colossians 3:22; Ephesians 6:5.

47

Acts 2:47

Open passage

简体中文

赞美神 - 见 Luke 24:53。

得众民的喜爱 - 见 Luke 2:52。

得众民……的喜爱 - 指得民众中大多数人的喜爱,即普遍得百姓的喜爱。这并不是说全体百姓都已与基督教和好;而是他们谦卑、严肃、敬虔的生活赢得了社群大多数人的好感,平息了反对与挑剔。这是非凡的效果;但神有能力平息反对,而没有比他朋友谦卑而一致的生活更能成就这事的了。

主将得救的人 - 见 Acts 5:14;Acts 11:24 等。成就这事的乃是主。人没有能力作成这事;基督徒乐于把教会的一切增长归于神的恩典。

天天加给他们 - 即使他们、或使他们倾向于与教会联合。

教会 - 指基督门徒的集合——τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ tē ekklēsia。译作“教会”的词本义是“蒙召出来的人”,用于指基督徒,因为他们蒙召出来,或从世人中分别出来。这词在福音书中只用过三次,Matthew 16:18;Matthew 18:17(两次)。它在新约别处经常出现,通常用于指基督的门徒。比较 Acts 5:11;Acts 7:38;Acts 8:1、Acts 8:3;Acts 9:31;Acts 11:22、Acts 11:26;Acts 12:1、Acts 12:5 等。在古典作家中,它用于指任何性质的“集会”;新约中也有两次这样用——Acts 19:39、Acts 19:41,那里译作“聚集的人”。

得救的人 - 这整个短语是一个分词——τοὺς σωζομένους tous sōzomenous——的翻译。它并不表达他们应当得救的任何目的,只是表明他们是那些将要得救、或正要得救的人。然而,从这说法可以看出,那些加入教会的人,是持续装饰其信仰告白、或显明自己是真诚基督徒的人。这里也暗示,凡要得救的人必归附神的教会。这是处处都要求的;当人甘愿面对世界、即刻献身服事主耶稣时,这就构成敬虔的一个证据。关于本章末节,可以作两点评论:其一,一致而敬虔的基督徒生活,其效果必赢得世人的敬重;其二,其效果必使得救的人数不断增加。这里他们是天天加给教会的;教会不断增长;凡有同样的热心、舍己、一致与祷告的地方,都可以期待同样的结果。

我们已经看到了基督教会的根基和第一场荣耀的宗教复兴。这一章值得一切福音的传道人、以及一切为神国之兴盛祷告的人深切研读。神既留下了这第一场伟大恩典之工的记载,我们当为此激发炽热的感恩;也当恳切祷告,愿他增多并扩展这样的景象,直到地上充满他的荣耀。

English original

Praising God - See Luke 24:53.

And having favour - See Luke 2:52.

With all the people - That is, with the great mass of the people; with the people generally. It does not mean that all the people had become reconciled to Christianity; but their humble, serious, and devoted lives won the favor of the great mass of the community, and silenced opposition and cavil. This was a remarkable effect, but God has power to silence opposition; and there it nothing so well suited to do this as the humble and consistent lives of his friends.

And the Lord added - See Acts 5:14; Acts 11:24, etc. It was the Lord who did this. There was no power in man to do it; and the Christian loves to trace all increase of the church to the grace of God.

Added - Caused, or inclined them to be joined to the church.

The church - To the assembly of the followers of Christ - τῇ ἐκκλησίᾳ tē ekklēsia. The word rendered "church" properly means "those who are called out," and is applied to Christians as being called out, or separated from the world. It is used only three times in the gospels, Matthew 16:18; Matthew 18:17, twice. It occurs frequently in other parts of the New Testament, and usually as applied to the followers of Christ. Compare Acts 5:11; Acts 7:38; Acts 8:1, Acts 8:3; Acts 9:31; Acts 11:22, Acts 11:26; Acts 12:1, Acts 12:5, etc. It is used in Classic writers to denote "an assembly" of any kind, and is twice thus used in the New Testament Acts 19:39, Acts 19:41, where it is translated "assembly."

Such as should be saved - This whole phrase is a translation of a participle - τοὺς σωζομένους tous sōzomenous. It does not express any purpose that they should be saved, but simply the fact that they were those who would be, or who were about to be saved. It is clear, however, from this expression, that those who became members of the church were those who continued to adorn their profession, or who gave proof that they were sincere Christians. It is implied here, also, that those who are to be saved will join themselves to the church of God. This is everywhere required; and it constitutes one evidence of piety when they are willing to face the world, and give themselves at once to the service of the Lord Jesus. Two remarks may be made on the last verse of this chapter; one is, that the effect of a consistent Christian life will be to command the respect of the world; and the other is, that the effect will be continually to increase the number of those who shall be saved. In this case they were daily added to it; the church was constantly increasing; and the same result may be expected in all cases where there is similar zeal, self-denial, consistency, and prayer.

We have now contemplated the foundation of the Christian church and the first glorious revival of religion. This chapter deserves to be profoundly studied by all ministers of the gospel, as well as by all who pray for the prosperity of the kingdom of God. It should excite our fervent gratitude that God has left this record of the first great work of grace, and our earnest prayers that He would multiply and extend such scenes until the earth shall be filled with His glory.